1
is!
A NEW EASY LATIN PBIMEK.
F. HAVERFIELD,
* LANCING COLLEGE
SHOREHAM,
SUSSEX
A NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER
BY
REV. EDMUND FOWLE,
AMESBUllY HOUSE SCHOOL, BICKLEY, KENT,
AUTI10B OF
1 Short and Easy Latin Book," " Short and Easy Greek Book,
" Gods and Heroes," " Schoolboy's First Book of Easy Poetry,"
etc., etc., etc.
LONDON :
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWREY,
PATEKNOSTEK SQUAEE.
1886.
As boys are not over- careful in the use of Books, and
as this New Easy Latin Primer should be constantly in
the learner's hands, the several parts have been issued
separately at One Shilling each.
Part I. Accidence.
II. Syntax.
,, III. Irregular Latin Verbs.
IV. Difficiliora taking in the Gender and Pecu-
liarities of the Substantive, etc., etc.
PREFACE.
THIS little Book is an attempt to supply a want that
is still universally felt a Latin Primer sufficiently full
and yet sufficiently easy for our Preparatory and for
the Lower Forms of our Public. Schools.
It has been thought well to follow in many particulars
the lines of the P. S. L. P.
AMESBURY HOUSE, BICKLEY, KENT.
January 13th, 1886.
*** Certain matter will be found repeated in these pages,
but this has been found necessary, so that each of the four
parts, when published separately, may be complete in itself.
PART I. ACCIDENCE.
PART I. ACCIDENCE.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
, 11
, 12
, 12
13
14
1. Latin Alphabet ....
2. Parts of Speech ....
3. Gender, Number, Case .
4. Parts of Speech explained
5. Stem and Root ....
6. Substantives 15
7. Declension of Substan-
tives 16
8. Gender of the Substan-
tive 18
9. Adjectives 20
10. Adjectives Three Term. . 21
11. Adjectives Two Term. .
12. Adjectives One Term. .
13. Notes on the Adjectives .
14. Numeral Adjectives . .
15. Numerals
16. Numerals (in full) . .
17. Comparison of Adjectives .
18. Irregular Comparisons
19. Notes on Comparison . .
20. Comparison of Adverbs .
21. Pronouns
22. Declension of Pronouns .
23. Compounds of Relative
Pronouns, etc. . . .
24. The Verb " Sum " . .
25. The Verb 34
26. Transitive and Intransi-
tive Verbs 34
27. Stem of the Verb ... 35
28. Regular Verbs .... 36
PAGE
29. Participles 37
30. Regular Verbs Conjugated 37
31. Tenses of Regular Verbs
(Active) 38
32. Tenses of Regular Verbs
(Passive) 40
33. Imperative Mood (Active
and Passive) . ... 42
34. Infinitive Mood (Active
and Passive) .... 43
35. Gerunds, Supines, Parti-
ciples 44
36. Irregular or Anomalous
Verbs 45
37. Tenses in full of Irregular
Verbs 46
38. Deponent Verbs .... 48
39. Deponent Verb in full
(Utor) 50
40. Impersonal Verbs ... 52
41. Defective Verbs .... 54
42. Quasi-Passive and Semi-
Deponent Verbs ... 55
43. Derived Verbs .... 56
44. Adverbs 57
45. Prepositions 58
46. Conjunctions 59
47. Interjections 59
48. General Rules for the
Quantities of Latin
Words (Prosody) ... 60
49. Epitome 62
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER,
PART I. ACCIDENCE.
LATIN ALPHABET, etc.
The Latin Alphabet is the same as the English without w.
The letters have also two forms like the English : (a)
the Capital or Ancient ; (b) the Small or Modern.
The Alphabet also, as in English, is divided into :
(a) Vowels, (6) Consonants.
a. Vowels sound by themselves, and are : a, e, i, o, u, y.
b. The Consonants must be joined with Vowels to have
any sound ; as, b (be), c (ce), f (ef).
The Consonants again are subdivided into
1. Mutes. b, c, d, g, k, p, q, t.
2. Nasals, m, n.
3. Liquids. 1, r,
4 Spirants, f, h, j, s, T.
5. Double, x, z, made up of cs, ds.
There are six Diphthongs (two vowels with a combined
sound) : ce, ce, au, in common use ; ei, eu, ui, seldom used.
Latin is spelt by syllables, the quantity of
which is long ~, short w , or doubtful ^.
The stops in Latin are the same as those used in English.
11
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
The Parts of Speech are eight.
1. Substantive
2. Adjective
3. Pronoun
4. Verb
5. Adverb
6. Preposition
7. Conjunction
8. Interjection
The Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb change their
meaning by their endings. These changes are called
Flexions, and in making these changes Nouns are said
to be declined, Verbs conjugated. The other parts of
speech, sometimes called Particles, have no flexions.
GENDEK, NUMBEE, CASE.
1. The Noun consists of Substantive, Adjective, and
Pronoun. These have for the most part Gender, Number,
and Case. There are
Three Genders:
(a) Masculine, (b) Feminine, (c) Neuter.
Two Numbers :
(a) Singular, a table; (b) Plural, tables.
Six Cases, known in English by their signs, in Latin by
their endings or flexions.
Nom. Answers Who or what?
Voc. Used in speaking to persons.
Ace. Answers Whom or what ?
Gen - Of whom, of what, whose ?
But- , To or for whom or what ?
By, with, or from whom, or what?
PARTS OF SPEECH. 13
PARTS OF SPEECH EXPLAINED.
1. The Noun Substantive is the name of anything ; as,
a pen, Ccesar, Corinth. Names of persons and places are
Proper Nouns all others are Common Nouns.
2. The Noun Adjective is joined with a Substantive, to
show the quality of the Substantive. Hence it is said to
qualify a Substantive. A good Icing ; a bad pen.
3. The Pronoun is sometimes used instead of (pro) a
noun. Hence its name. Sometimes it qualifies a Noun
This boy is the son of that good gentleman, and he is a
good boy himself.
4. The Verb tells us
(a) What a thing or person is. The boy is good.
(6) What a thing or person does. The boy loves.
(c) What a thing or person suffers, i.e. what is being
done to one. The boy is loved.
5. The Adverb is added to a Verb or Adjective, or another
Adverb, to qualify its meaning ; as, The boy runs quickly.
6. The Preposition from pr8B and pono, to place before,
is placed before a Noun, to mark its relation to another
word ; as, The boy was hurt by the dog. The boy is
without knowledge.
7. The Conjunction (from cum^ogether, and jungo, to join)
joins together words and clauses ; as, The boys and girls.
Winter or summer. The dog bit the cat and ran away.
8. The Interjection (a word as it were thrown in among
other words, from inter, among, and jacio, to throw) is an
exclamation Lo ! it thunders !
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
STEM AND ROOT.
STEM.
The Stem of a word has been defined as " that part on which the
changes of flexion are based," i.e., it is that part of the word which
remains after the variable endings have been taken away.
In Nouns the Stem is found by throwing away rum from the Genitive
Plural of Declensions I., II., V., and um from the Genitive Plural of
Declensions III., IV. Thus
The Stem of Memo, is Hens A.
,, ,, Dominus is DominO.
,, ,, Lapis is LapiD.
The Stem of Nubes is Nubl.
,, Gradus is QradU.
Dies is DiE.
But before a Noun can be declined, when the last letter of the Stem
is a vowel, as in mensa, domino, nubi, gradw, die, this vowel must be
cast off, and the case-endings can then be added to what remains, which
is called the Clipt Stem.
For all practical purposes the part of the Stem needful for declining
a Substantive can be found by throwing away the Genitive Singular
termination of the five declensions.
ROOT.
The Boot of a word must not be confounded with its Stem. It is
really that part which kindred words (words of one family) have in com-
mon. Thus in the words acies, acus, acuo, the common root is ac, sharp,
but their Stems would be respectively acie, acu, acu.
SUBSTANTIVES. 15
SUBSTANTIVES.
A Noun Substantive is the name of anything ; as, a pen,
Ccesar, Corinth.
There are five Declensions of Substantives, known by
the ending of the Genitive case.
1. ae (diphthong), Mensa, mensce. 3. is, Nubes, nubis.
2. i, Dominus, domini. 4. us, Gradus, grades.
5. ei, Ees, ret.
NOTES ON THE SUBSTANTIVES.
Peculiarities of the Substantives are given at length (pp.
168-183). We need only give here two or three simple notes.
1. Nom. and Voc. cases are alike in both numbers, excepting some of
those of the Second Declension ; as, dominus, Voc., doming ; films, Voc.,
fili.
2. In Neuter Nouns the Nona., Voc., and Ace. are alike in both num-
bers, and in the plural they end in a.
3. Some words of the Second Declension in er keep the e throughout ;
as, puer, pueri ; some drop it ; as, magister, magistri.
4. In the Third Declension note should be taken of nubes, nubis, which
does not increase in the Genitive case, and lapis, lapidis, which does.
Those which increase in the Genitive Singular have their Genitive Plural
in wm instead of ium, with exceptions.
5. Words of the Third Declension have in the nominative various
terminations (or endings), as nubes > lapis, opus, mare. All other cases
depend on the Genitive singular.
The following Substantives are declined (see over) :
Mensa, mensse (f.), a table.
Dominus, domini, (m.), a lord.
Magister, magistri, (m.), a master.
Regnum, regni (n.), a kingdom.
Nubes, nubis (f.), a cloud.
Ees, rei (f.), a thing.
Lapis, lapidis (m.), a stone.
Opus, operis (n.), a work.
Mare, maris (n.), the sea.
Gradus, gradus (m.), a step.
Genu, genus (n.), a knee.
16 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES.
FIRST DECLENSION.
S. N. Mensa (f) a table
P. N. Mensae (f.) tables
V. Mensa table
V. Mensse tables
A. Mensam table
A. Mensns tables
G. Mensae of a table
G. Mensarum of tables
D. Mensse to or for a table
D. Mensis to or for tables
A. Mensa "by, with or from,
A. Mensis by, with or from,
a table tables
SECOND DECLENSION.
S. N. Dominus (m.) a lord
P. N". Domini (m.) lords
V. Domine Lord
V. Domini lords
A. Dominum lord
A. Dominos lords
G. Domini of a lord
G. Dominorum of lords
D. Domino to or for a lord
D. Dominis to or for lords
A. Domino by, with or from,
A. Dominis by, with or from,
a lord
lords
S. N. Magister(m.)a master
P. N. Magistri (m.) Casters
Y. Magister master
V. Magistri masters
A. Magistrum master
A. Magistros masters
G. Magistri of a master
G. Magistrorum of masters
D. Magistro to or for a master
D. Magistris to or /or masters
A. Magistro by, with or from,
A. Magistris by, witft- or from,
a master
masters
S. N. Kegnum (n.) a kingdom
P. N. Regna (n.) kingdoms
V. Eegnum kingdom
V. Regna kingdoms
A. Eegnum kingdom
A. Regna kingdoms
G. Regni of a kingdom
G. Regnorum of kingdoms
D. Regno toorforakingd:
D. Regnis to or for kingdoms
A. Regno by, with or from,
A. Regnis by, wii/i or from,
a kingdom
kingdoms
THIRD DECLENSION.
S. N. Nubos (f.) a cloud
P. N. Nubes (f.) clouds
V. Nubes cloud
V. Nubes clouds
A. Nubem cloud
A. Nubes clouds
G. Nubis of a cloud
G. Nubium of clouds'
D. Nubi to or for a cloud
D. Nubibus <o or for clouds
A. Nube by, with or from,
D. Nubibus by, with or from,
a cloud
clouds
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES.
THIRD DECLENSION.
S. 1ST. Lapis (m.)
a stone
P. N. Lapides (m. ) stones
V. Lapis
stone
V. Lapides
stones
A. Lapidem
stone
A. Lapides
stones
G. Lapidis
of a stone
G. Lapidum
of stones
D. Lapidi
to or for a stone
D. Lapidibus
to or for stones
A. Lapide
by, with or from,
A. Lapidibus
by, with or from,
a stone
stones
S. N. Opus (n.)
a work
P. N. Opera (n.)
works
V. Opus
work
V. Opera
works
A. Opus
work
A. Opera
works
G. Operis
of a work
G, Operum
of works
D. Operi
to or for a work
D. Operibus
to or for works
A. Opere
by, with or from,
A. Operibus
by, with or from,
a work
works
S. N. Marg (n.)
the sea
P. N. Maria (n.)
the sea
V. Mare
sea,
V, Maria
seas
A. Mare
the sea,
A. Maria
the seas
G. Maris
of the sea
G. Marium
of the seas
D. Marl
to or for \ihe sea,
D. Maribus
to or for [the seas
A. Mari
by, with or from,
A. Maribus
by, with or from,
FOURTH DECLENSION.
S. N. Gradus (m.)
a step
P.N. Gradus (m.)
steps
V. Gradus
Ostep
V. Gradus
steps
A. Gradum
a step
A. Gradus
steps
G. Gradus
of a step
G. Graduum
of steps
D. Gradui
to or for \a step
D. Gradibus
to or for {steps
A. Gradu
by, with or from
A. Gradibus
by, with or from,
S.N. Genu(n.)
a knee
P. N. Genua (n.)"
knees
V. Genu
Oknee
V. Genua
knees
A. Genu
a knee
A. Genua
knees
G. Genus
of a knee
G. Genuum
of knees
D. Genu
to or for [a knee
D. Genibus
to or for [knees
A. Genu
by, with or from,
A. Genibus
by, with or from,
FIFTH DECLENSION.
S. N. Ees (.)
V. Res
A. Eem
G. Rei
D. Rei
A. Re
a, thing
a thing
a thing
of a thing
to, or for la thing
by, with or from,
P. N. Res
V. Res
A. Res
G. Rerum
D. Rebus
A. Rebus
things
things
things
of things
to or for [things
by, with or from
18 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER,
GENDER OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
There are three Genders ; a Substantive must be either
(a) Masculine, (Z>) Feminine, (c) Neuter. Some also are
Common, i.e. Masculine or Feminine.
We give two common General Rules :
I. Certain classes of things are of certain Genders.
Masculine.
Males. People. Mountains (most).
Months. Winds. Rivers (most).
Feminine.
Females. Countries (most).
Islands. Cities and Trees (most).
Neuter.
Indeclinable Nouns ; as, fas, nefas, nihil.
Common.
Words applicable to either sex ; as,
Conjux, husband or wife.
Hostis, an enemy.
II, Genders of Substantives are in a general way also
known by the terminations in each Declension.
First. Feminine, in a and e ; Masculine in as and es.
Second. Masculine, in MS and er ; Neuter in urn.
Third, (a) Masculine terminations: o, or, os, er, es, increasing in
gen., ex (not x).
(b) Feminine terminations : is, as, aus, x (not ex) s pre-
ceded by a consonant, es not increasing in genitive.
(c) Neuter terminations : or, ur, us, c, a, t, I, e, n.
Fourth. Masculine in us ; Neuter in u.
Fifth. Feminine.
"But to these rules there are many exceptions (see pp. 158-
167.)
GENDERS OF SUBSTANTIVES. 19
GENDER OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
EXCEPTIONS.
DECLENSION I.
Nouns in a denoting Males, are Masculine ; as, poeta, a poet.
So also are
Hadria, Adriatic Sea. Scurra, a buffoon.
DECLENSION II. ,
A few in -us are Feminine :
Alvus, the belly. Humus, the ground.
Arctus, the Bear (constellation). Pampinus, vine-leaf.
Carbasus, fine flax. Pirus, a pear-tree, (a)
Colus, a distaff. Sapphirus, a sapphire. (6)
Vannus, a winnowing fan.
A few in us are Neuter :
Pelagus, the sea. Vulgus, the common people
Virus, poison. (generally).
DECLENSION in.
Exceptions are numerous (see pp. 158-167).
DECLENSION IV.
A few in us are Feminine :
Acus, a needle. Manus, the hand.
Anus, an old woman. Nurus, a daughter-in-law.
Domus, a, house. Porticus, a portico.
Idus (pl.)j tl ie Ides. Socrus, a mother-in-law.
Tribus, a tribe.
DECLENSION V.
All are Feminine except dies, which is common in the Singular, but Mascu-
line in the Plural, and meridies, midday, which is Masculine.
(a) And names of plants.
(b) And names of jewels.
20 NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
ADJECTIVES.
A Noun Adjective qualifies a Substantive, as
A good boy. A tall tree. A happy child.
A bright day. Cold weather. A sad state.
Adjectives are divided into three Classes ; those which have
in the Nominative
1. Three terminations. 2. Two terminations. 3. One termination.
1. Adjectives of three terminations end in
us, a, urn, as bonws, bona, bonwm, good,
er, a, urn, as tener, tenera, tenerwm, tender.
er t is, e, as acer, acrzs, acre, sharp.
2. Adjectives of two terminations end in
is, e, as tristt*, triste, sad.
or, us, as melior, melius, better.
3. Adjectives of one termination have various endings; as,
Felix, happy.
Ingens, immense.
Praestans, excellent.
The following sample Adjectives are declined;
Bonus bona bonum good.
Tener tenera tenerum tender.
Acer acris acre sharp.
Tristis triste sad.
Melior melius better.
Felix happy.
ADJECTIVES.
21
ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS.
Masc.
S. N. Bonus
V. Bone
A. Bonum
G. Boni
D. Bono
Fern. Neut.
bona bonum
bona bonum
bonam bonum
bonaa boni
bonaa bono
A. Bono bona bono
S. N. Tener tenera -erum
V. Tener tenera -erum
A. Tenerum teneram -erum
G. Teneri tenersB teneri
D. Tenero tenerae tenero
A. Tenero tenera tenero
S. N. Acer acris acre
V. Acer acris acre
A. Acrem acrem acre
G. Acris )
D. Acri > all genders
A. Acri )
Masc.
P. N. Boni
V. Boni
A. Bonos
Fern. Neut.
bonae bona
bonaa bona
bonas bona
G. Bonorum -arum -orum
P. N. Teneri tenerse tenera
V. Teneri teneraa tenera
A. Teneros teneras tenera
G. Tenerorum -rarum -rorum
fc 3 .
P. N. Acres acres acria
V. Acres acres acria
A. Acres acres acria
G. Acrium )
D. Acribus > all genders
A. Acribus 3
ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS.
M. F. N.
S. N. Tristis triste
V. Tristis triste
A. Tristem triste
G. Tristis)
D. Tristi { all genders
A. Tristi )
N. Melior melius
V. Melior melius
A. Meliorem melius
G. Melioris )
D. Meliori > all genders
A. Meliore(i).)
M. F. N.
P. N. Tristes tristia
V. Tristes tristia
A. Tristes tristia
G. Tristium)
D. Tristibus > all genders
A. Tristibus.)
P. N. Meliores meliora
V. Meliores meliora
A. Meliores meliora
G. Meliorum )
D. Melioribus > all genders
A. Melioribus^
ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION.
S. N. Felix (m. f. n.)
V. Felix
A. Felicem (m. f.) felix (n.)
G. Felicis
D. Felici
A. Felici (rarely Felice)
P. N. Felices (m. f.) felicia (n.)
V. Felices felicia
A. Felices felicia
G. Felicium)
D. Felicibus > all genders
A. Felicibus )
22 NEW EASY LATIN PKIHER.
NOTES ON THE ADJECTIVE.
There are some Adjectives declined like tener, tenera,
tenerum, which however drop the e, as
Niger, nigra, nigrum, black.
There are eleven other Adjectives declined like acer. Celer
keeps e before r. It has also ium in the Gen. Plural ;
um only when used of the ancient body-guard at Rome
Celeres, Celerum.
1. Alacer, lively. 5. Paluster, marshy. 8. Saluber, healthful.
2. Campester, level. 6. Pedester, pedestrian. 9. Silvester, woody.
3. Celeber, crowded. 7. Puter, rotten. 10. Terrester, earthly.
4. Equester, equestrian. 11. Volucer, winyed.
Adjectives of one termination have various endings
rapax, rapacious. praestans, excellent. ingens, immense.
NUMERAL OR PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
There are some Adjectives which are however declined like
bonus or tener or niger y excepting that they have no Voc. and
make the Gen. Sing, to end in ius and the Dative in i. Alius
also makes a\'md instead of aliwm in the Neut. Sing.
Unus, one. Uter, which (of two).
Solus, alone. Neuter, neither (of two).
Totus, whole. Alter one (of two).
Ullus, any. Nullus, none.
Alius, one (of any number).
The numeral Adjectives, duo, two; tres, three, are thus declined :
N. Duo duae duo N. Tres tria
A. Duos (o) duas duo A. Tres tria
G. Duoruin -arum -orum G. Trium
D. Duobus -abus -obus D. Tribus
A. Duobus -abus -obus A. Tribus
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 23
NUMERALS.
Numerals are divided into
1. Cardinal numbers those on which the other num-
bers hinge (cardo, a hinge) ; as, unus, one; duo, two.
2. Ordinal numerals denoting numerical rank (ordo) :
primus, first ; secundus, second.
3. Distributive numerals giving or distributing so many
apiece or at each time. Pueri scripserunt Unas epis-
tolas : The boys wrote two letters apiece.
4. Numeral Adverbs denoting the number of times
anything happens or is done. Puer bis locutus est :
The boy spoke twice.
The general rule for writing compound numbers is
1. In numbers less than twenty.
(a) Small number first, without et. Tres decem (13) (written
as one word, tredecwi).
(b) Larger number first, with et. Decem et tres (13).
(c) Duo de viginti (18). Unde viginti (19).
2. In numbers over twenty.
(a) Just the reverse small number with et.
Eomulus reigned thirty-seven years : Romulus reg
navit septem et triginta annos.
(b) Larger numbers without et.
To men are assigned thirty-two teeth : Dentes triceni
bini viris attribuuntur.
3. In numbers above one hundred the larger comes first,
with or without et. Centum (et) septem (107).
4. The thousands are expressed by prefixing the numeral
adverbs to mille, as, bis mille, ter mille (chiefly in
poetry) ; or by prefixing the cardinals to milia, as,
duo milia, tria milia.
N.B. Mille, a thousand, is an indeclinable adjective. Milia, thousands, is a neuter
plural substantive, and is declined like maria; so that duo milia hominum=two thou-
sand men.
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
I -fi 1
3 g i 1 1 1 1 i i
fjllfmfmll
ns
lilt ssf^
iiilLjfliJIiifl
ifiiisiiiillllll
S -d 9 ^ cr cr
.S
NUMERALS,
Si55 < 8g'i- -s
m *
2 8
bo
.a
-3 o
*'
25
.Sa
26 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives have three degrees of comparison :
1. Positive. 2. Comparative. 3. Superlative.
The comparative and superlative are, ordinarily, both formed
from the positive.
The comparative is formed from the positive by changing
i or is of the Gen. Singular into ior ; as,
Altus, high Gen. alti Comp. altior
Brevis, short ,, brevis brevior
The superlative is formed from the positive by changing i
or is of the Gen. Singular into issimus ; as,
Altus, high Gen. alti Sup. altissimus
Brevis, short ,, brevis ,, brevissimus
Adjectives however in er form their comparative regularly,
but their superlative by adding rimus to the Nom. Singular;
as,
Pulcher, beautiful pulcherrimus
Celer, swift celerriinus
Six Adjectives in lis, though they form their comparative
regularly, form their superlative by changing is into limus ;
as, facilis, facilior, facillmms
Facilis, easy. Similis, like. Gracilis, slender.
Difficilis, difficult. Dissimilis, unlike. Humilis, lowly.
But other Adjectives in lis are Regular ; as,
Utilis utilior utilissimus.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
IRREGULAR COMPARISONS.
Some Adjectives are compared quite irregularly, as in
English, the comparative or superlative being obtained from
other words long since unused or forgotten.
Bonus, good
melior
optimus
Malus, bad
pejor
pessimus
Magnus, great
major
maximus
Parvus, small
minor
minimus
Multus, much
plus (neuter)
plurimus
Exterus, outward
exterior
c extremus
(_ extimus
Inferus, low
inferior
infimus and Imus
Superus, high
superior
C supremus
(. summus
Posterus, next-after
posterior
f postremus
\ postumus
Nequam, worthless
nequior
nequissimus
Vetus, old
vetustior
veterrimus
Maturus, ripe
maturior
C maturrimus
\ maturissimus
Egenus, needy
egeutior
egentissimus
Providus, provident
providentior
providentissimus
Dives, rich
divitior or ditior
( divitissimus or
C ditissimus
Senex, old
c senior, "i
(. natu major )
natu maximus
Juvenis, young
("junior, )
(. natu minor )
natu minimus
There are a few others.
28 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
NOTES ON COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
1. The comparative of multus (plus) has no masc. or fern, gender in the
Singular, but full Plur., though somewhat irregular. Nom. and Ace.,
plures, plura; Gen., plurium ; Dat. and Abl., pluribus
2. Adjectives in us pure (i.e. us preceded by a vowel) use for comparison
rnagis and maxime ; as, magis pius, maxime pius ; except those in quus ;
as, antiquus, antiquior, antiquissimus, and a few others.
3. Adjectives in dicus, ficus, volus change us of the positive into entior
and entissimus; as, magni/icws, magniflce?itior, magnificentim'wws.
Ocior, swifter, has no positive. Many Adjectives have a positive only.
4. There are some Adjectives which seem to spring from Prepositions.
Preposition. Positive Adj. Comparative. Superlative.
E, ex, out of
Intra, within
exteriis, outside
exterior
interior
extremus (extlmus)
intlmus
SupSr, above
Infra, below
sftpe'rus, high above
iuf&rus, deep below
superI6r
inferior
supremus (summus)
inflmus (imus)
Prse, before
Post, after
postgrfis, next after
prISr
posterior
primus, jflrst
postremiis (postumtis)
Cltra, on near side
Ultra, beyond
clt^rlor
ulterior
cltlmus
ultimas, last
Prtfpg, near
-
pr6pI5r
proxlmfis
De, down from
deterlor, worse
deterrimag, worst
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
Adverbs are also compared.
The positive Adverb, when derived from an Adjective, ends chiefly in e
and ter; as, digne, worthily; graviter, heavily; so also saspe, often.
The comparative Adverb is the same as the neuter of the comparative
Adjective ; as, dignius, more worthily ; gravius, more heavily.
The superlative Adverb is like the superlative Adjective, only it ends
me; as, dignissime, most worthily; graviseime, most heavily; saepis-
sime, most often.
PRONOUNS.
29
PRONOUNS.
There are eight kinds of Pronouns.
1. Personal. 5. Definitive.
2. Eeflexive.
3. Possessive.
4. Demonstrative.
6. Kelative.
7. Interrogative.
8. Indefinite.
1. Personal Pronouns are :
1. Ego, I.
2. Tu, thou.
2. Reflexive:
Se (sese), himself, herself, itself, themselves
3. Possessive:
1. Meus, mine.
2. Tuus, thine.
3. Suus, his, hers, etc.
4. Demonstrative :
1. Is, that, he, she, it.
2. Hie, this (near me).
5. Definitive :
Idem, same.
6. Relative:
Qui, who or which.
4. Cujus, whose.
5. Noster, ours.
6. Vester, yours.
3. Ille, that (yonder).
4. Iste, that (near you).
Ipse, self.
7. Interrogative:
Quis, who or what ?
8. Indefinite:
Quis (aliquis) any one.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
S. N. Ego
P. Nos
S.N. Tu
P. Vos
A. Me
Nos
A. Te
Vos
G. Mei
Nostrum or I
G. Tui
Vestrum or I
D. Mihi
Nobis
D. Tibi
Vobis
A. Me
Nobis
A. Te
Vobis
30 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
N. (none)
i A. Se
G. Sui
D. Sibi
A. Se
are declined like bonus or
niger, except that meus makes
mi in the Voc. Sing. Masc.
Tuus and smis have no Voca-
tive.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1. Is, that, he, she, it.
2. Hie, this (near me).
S. N. Is
ea
id
A. Eum
earn
id
G.
Ejus
D.
Ei
A. Eo
ea
eo
S. N. Hie
haec
hoc
A. Hunc
hanc
hoc
G.
Hujus
D.
Huic
A. Hoc
hac
hoc
S. N. Ille
ilia
iUud
A. Ilium
ill am
illud
G.
Illius
D.
Illi
A. nio
ilia
illo
3. Ille, that (yonder, near him).
4. Iste, that (near you).
P.N. Ii(ei)
Eos
Eorum
Hi
Hos
Horum
nu
Illos
Illorum
Iste is declined like ille.
eae ea
eas ea
earum eorum
lis or els
lis or els
has base
has ha?c
harum horum
His
His
ill ilia
illas ilia
illarum illorum
Illis
Illis
DEFINITIVE PRONOUNS.
Idem, fame. Ipse, self.
S. N. Idem eadem Idem
A. Eundem eandem idem
G. Ejusdem
D. Eidem
A. Eodem eadem eodem
P.N. Eidem eadem eadem
A. Eosdem easdem eadem
G. Eorundem earundem eorundcm
D. iiadem or gisdem
A. lisdem or gisdem
Ipse is declined like ille, excepting that in the Neut. Nom. and Ace.
Sing, it makes ipsum instead of ipsud.
PRONOUNS.
31
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
Qui, wlw or which.
P.N. Qui quas quae
A. Quos quas quae
G. Quorum quarum quorum
D. Quibus or queis or quls
A. Quibus or queis or quis
The Interrogative Pronoun quis, and the Indefinite Pro-
noun quis, are mostly declined like qui, with some differences.
S. N. Qui
quae
quod
A. Quern
quam
quod
G.
Cujus
D.
Cui
A. Quo
qua
quo
INTERROGATIVE. ,
INDEFINITE.
Singular.
Singular.
Nom.
Quis
(quis)
quid ) ~.
Quis
qua
quid ")
Qui
quae
quod ) |
Qui
quae
quod)
Ace.
Quern
quam
quid")
Quem
quam
quid >
Quern
quam
quod ) o
Quern
quam
quod)
etc.
etc.
etc. ,
etc.
etc.
etc.
Tnth
5 other
forms a<
? Relative. ^
In the ot
ler forms a
,s Relativ
Indefinite Plur., Nom., Qui, quae, qua or quse.
COMPOUNDS OF RELATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, AND
INDEFINITE.
1. Quisnam, quidnam; qulnam, quaenam, quodnam, who, what?
2. Ecquis (for en-quis), ecqua, ecquid? EcquI, ecquae, ecquod, any one
(Interrogative.) So numquis, slquis, etc.
3. Aliquis, aliqua, aliquid ; AHquI, aliqua, aliquod, some one.
4. Quispiam, quaepiam, quippiam (quodpiam), any one.
5. Quisquam, quicquam; Genitive, cujusquam, etc., aw/ one at all.
6. Quldam, qusedam, quiddam (quoddam), a certain one.
7. Qulcumque, quaecumque, quodcumque, ichosoever, whatsoever.
8. Quisquls, whosoever, quidquid, whatsoever.
9. Qulvis, quaevls, quidvis (quodvls), any you will.
10. Qullibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (quodlibet), any you please.
11. Quisque, quaeque, quicque ; Quisque, quasque, quodque, each. So
Unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquicque (-quodque), each one.
32
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE VERB SUM.
Sura, es, esse, fui, futurus, to be.
Before other Verbs are given, it is necessary to know the
verb SUM, which is called the Auxiliary or helping Verb,
because it helps to conjugate the other verbs ; as Amatus sum
(p. 40). But when not used as an Auxiliary Verb it is called
Copulative, i.e. it "couples" the subject to the complement;
as, Homo est morfcalis ; man is mortal.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
S. Sum
I am
Es
thou art
Est
he is
P. Sumus
we are
Estis
Sunt
ye are
they are
FUTURE SIMPLE.
S. Ero
I shall be
Eris
thou wilt be
Erit
he will be
P. Ermms
we shall be
Eritis
Erunt
ye will be
they ivill be.
IMPERFECT.
Eram
I was
Eras
thou wast
Erat
he was
Eramus
we were
Eratis
ye were
Erant
they were
PERFECT.
Fui
I have been
Fuisti
thou hast been
Fuit
he has been
Fuimus
ice have been
Fuistis
ye have been
Fuerunt
they have been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PLUPERFECT.
I had been
thou hadst been
he had been
ice had been
ye had been
they had been
.PUTU
S. Fuero
BE .FERFECT.
I shall have been
r
Fueram
Fueris
thouivilt have been
Fueras
Fuerit
he will have been
Fuerat
P. Fuerimus
we shall have been
Fuerainus
Fueritis
ye will have been
Fueratis
Fuerint
they will have been
Fuerant
THE VERB SUM.
33
CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
IMPERFECT.
S. Sim I may be
Essem vel Forem I '
Sis thou mayest be
Esses vel Fores thou
Sit he may be
Esset vel Foret he
P. Simus we may be
Essemus vel Foremus we
Sitis ye may be
Essetis vel Foretis ye
Sint they may be
Essent vel Forent they ,
PERFECT.
PLUPERFECT.
S. Fuerim I may
Fuissem I should ^
Fueris thou mayest
R
Fuisses thouwouldst
Fuerit he may
Fuisset he would
P. Fuerfrnus we may
1
Fuissemus we should
Fueritus ye may
3
Fuissetis ye would
Fuerint they may >
Fuissent they would ,
IMPEEATIVE MOOD.
S. Es
P. Este
PRESENT.
be thou
be ye
FUTURE SIMPLE.
S. Esto thou must be
Esto he must be
Estote ye must be
Sunto they must be
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Future Participle
VEEB INFINITE.
Fuisse
Fore vel Futurus esse
Futurus
to be
to have been
to be about to be
about to be
No gerunds, supines, or Present Participle.
34 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE VERB.
Verbs are of various forms
1. Regular as, Amo, moneo, rego, audio.
2. Irregular as, Possum, volo, nolo, malo, etc.
3. Deponent partly active, partly passive; as, Loquor, 1 speak,
p. 48.
4. Impersonal used in 3rd pers. sing, and infinitive mood; as,
Piget me, it grieves me.
5. Defective not having all their parts ; as, Inquam, I say.
6. Quasi-passive, or semi-deponent as, fio, I am made ;
gaudeo, gavisus sum, I rejoice.
All of which will be mentioned in their proper places.
TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
Verbs are either
1. Transitive; or, 2. Intransitive.
1. Transitive
The word transitive is made up of two Latin words, trans, across,
and eo, to go. For our present purpose it will signify passing on, and
it means, when spoken of a Verb, that the action of the Verb passes on
to the case which follows it
I love the boys. I hit the table. I eat an apple.
Here it can be seen at once that love, hit, eat are transitive Verbs ;
that is, that there is an action in the Verb which passes on to the case.
2. Intransitive.
A Verb is intransitive, that is, not transitive (in meaning not) when
there is no action in the Verb to pass on ; as
I stand. The tree grows. The bird flies.
Here it can be seen that in stand, grows, flies there is no action that
will pass on.
There are some Verbs which are both transitive and intransitive ; as
Doleo, I grieve, grieve for.
THE VEEB.
35
STEM OF THE VERB.
To conjugate a Verb a boy must know, not merely the Stem of the
Present, but also that of the Perfect and Supine.
The Stem of the Present is found in the Imperative Mood ; except (1)
in the Third Conjugation, where the final " e " must be cut off ; and (2) in
Deponent Verbs, where re or ere must be thrown away. Thus the stem of
Amo is Ama.
Moneo is Mone.
Rego is Reg-
Audio is Audi.
Venor is Vena.
Vereoris Vere.
Utor is Dt-
Partior is Part i
The Stem of the Perfect of any Eegular (a) Verb of
CONJUGATION I. is found by adding v to the Stem of the Present ;
as, Ama, amav.
CONJUGATION II. is found by changing e of the Stem of the Present
into u; as, Mone, monu.
CONJUGATION IV. is found by adding v to the stem of the Present ;
as, Audi t audiv.
The Stem of the Perfect in Conjugation III. is so irregular that it can
only be found by consulting a dictionary.
The Stem of the Supine of any Eegular (a) Verb is found by adding t
to the Stem of the Present in Conjugations I., IV. ; as, ama, amat ; audi,
audit. In Conjugations II., III., the Stem of the Supine is so irregular
that the Verb should be looked out.
We add here the Tenses, etc., formed from the different Stems.
From Stem of Supine.
Supines
Participle Fut. Act.
Infinitive Fut. Pass.
Participle Perf. Pass.
Perfect Pass.
From Stem of Present.
Present Act. and Pass.
Future Simple A. and P.
Imperf. Act. and Pass.
Imperat. Act. and Pass.
Infin. Pres. Act. and
Pass.
Gerund and Gerundive
Participle Pres. Act.
From Stem of Perfect.
Perfect Act.
Future Perfect Act.
Pluperfect Act.
Infinitive Perfect Act.
Future Perf. Pass.
Pluperfect Pass.
Infinitive Perf. Pass.
(a) We say Eegular Verbs, for many are irregular, and it would be beyond the
scope of the present manual to enter into the various irregularities.
36 NEW EASY LATIN PEIMER.
THE REGULAR VERBS.
Regular Verbs have
4 Conjugations. 2 Numbers.
2 Voices. 6 Persons (generally).
4 Moods. 3 Gerunds.
6 Tenses. 2 Supines.
4 Participles.
THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS
are known by the ending of the Infinitive Mood.
1. Has a long before re; as, amdre, to love.
2. Has e long before re ; as, monere, to advise.
3. Has short before re ; as, reg^re, to rule.
4. Has I long before re ; as, audlre, to hear.
Two VOICES.
_ _, Six TENSES.
1. Active. 2. Passive.
1. Present,
FOUR MOODS.
1. Indicative.
2. Conjunctive.
3 k Imperative.
4. Infinitive.
2. Future Simple.
3. Imperfect.
4. Perfect.
5. Future Perfect.
6. Pluperfect.
Each tense, in Indicative and Conjunctive Mood, lias two Numbers, and
three Persons in each Number.
The Imperative has Number and Person, but the latter
incomplete.
The Infinitive has neither Number nor Person.
THREE GERUNDS.
1. Nom. or Ace. in dum ; as, amandfw?, loving.
2. Genitive in di ; as, amandi, of loving.
3. Dat. or Abl. in do ; as, amando,/or or by loving.
Two SUPINES.
1. Supine in urn ; as, amatwm, to love.
2. Supine in u ; as, amatw, to be loved, or in loving.
PARTICIPLES. 37
PARTICIPLES.
There are four Participles :
1. Present in ans or ens; as, amans, loving ; monews, advising.
2. Participle in dus (known as the Gerundive) ; as, amandus, to be,
that is to be, or that must be loved.
3. Perfect in us ; as, amatws, loved, or having been loved.
4. Future in rus ; as, amaturus, going to love, about to love.
These Participles are also classed in another way :
Two Active. 1. Present in ans or ens.
2. Future in rus.
Two Passive. 1. Perfect in ws.
2. Participle in dus.
THE REGULAR VERBS CONJUGATED.
(To love.)
(To advise.)
(To rule.)
(To hear.)
1st Pers. Pres.
Amo
Moneo
Rego
Audio
2nd Pers. Pres.
Amas
Mones
Regis
Audis
Inf. Pres.
Amare
Monere
Regere
Audire
Perf.
Amavi
Monui
Rexi
Audivi
Gerund in dum
Amandum }
Monendum }
Regendum "^
Audiendum }
di
Amandi >
Monendi >
Regendi >
Audiendi
Amando 3
Monendo j
Regendo )
Audiendo )
Supine in um
Amatum ">
Momtum ^
Rectum ")
Auditum ")
j) **
Aniatu $
Monitu )
Rectu j
Auditu j
Part. Pres.
Amans ^
Monens ^
Regens "
Audiens l
Fut.
Amaturus \
Moniturus )
Recturus 3
Auditurus j
1st Pers. Pres.
Inf. Pres.
Perf.
Supine in um
This long form may be much shortened.
Amo
Amare
Amavi
Amatum
Moneo
Monere
Monui
Monitum
Rego
Regere
Rexi
Rectum
Audio
Audire
Audivi
Audltcim
SHORT FORM FOR PASSIVES.
1st Pers. Pres.
Inf. Pres.
Part. Perf.
Gerundive
Amor
Amari
Amatus
Amandus
Moneor
Moneri
Momtus
Monendus
Regor
Regi
Rectus
Regendus
Audior
Audlri
Auditus
Audiendus
38
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
in
1 I
H |
a
<i
u
s ^ ^
11
^ <i
5 *43 P "8
S .S i S
> "> >
a a
THE REGULAR VERBS.
39
B *
OH
>
O
O
i i
d c3* ba d
a a a a
PH
ll
8 S|
| |
*
^^ a
ss 1
| II ||f
.1 .1 .1 .1 J .2
e3 cJ c3
a a a
<i <i <i
a
rt 0>
I
II
s l
PH
K* >
rt e3
a a
jj
s s
l
f <
si
8 j *
a g
'S
1^1
5 &
40
NEW EASY LATIN PRIME B.
e d
H^|
pdaoj dq ii[6iw
Amarem
Ameremi
02
P-*
03
CQ
O
ti
duidq
^ 3 -S S
g | a a |
a a a a a
svai
I . a -a -g
n s "S S
a a a a a
111
v
-0
la!
pdsiapv
03
**
g
t!
JO
H
S
S
S
1
g
O3
g
-3
e
e
^
g
5*
.^
g
e
I
<*>
S
<a
<
KH
1
1
QJ
g
^ J'
H
^>
H
1
-^
T
*
S
1
Amaris (r(
Amatur
Amamur
Amamini
Amantur
Moneor
Moneris (]
Monetur
Monemur
Monemini
Monentur
S
- a a
m
GO
&
m
-S
II
^3 ^3
55
THE REGULAR VERBS. 41
Uddq am[ fiviu S
acimi
o r *> S ^ iT 3
o N45M NNN|
s ^ a , ,, | co ^ I S, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 *s "i ^ I i 1 | f 1 1 1 1 1 1 a a a
CQ CQ 02 s 02 CQ rt pj OQ co o> <U o) O> ^ 9 ^ <d
3 rj ry Q rt ^> ^ !3 ^ _< W2 JT7 CO ^^
1 1 1 ? ? " *s a ^s -' 1 ' *-i s s ^
j|J s u sis" i 1 1 1 11 s! s
<!<!<j1<3j<l<l ^2_S -tj<j^<fj<^*jj +^S-5
p^ I
2 2 .
5 ^ "S o
^ {'.. c .
|KH^* - g|
%
%
^ m S ^ fl S 3
^ 8 .g i/SJ -s * I i "2 1 3
^c3SS>g^g a ^ sSs 2gg fldS
SMtoco^^QJ <j ~3cOco M cDCDa) SflS^l
tj 53 E3 C3 -r-r .PH .^ O o f*< P f3 ff .,_, .^ .^ ^ J3 ^,
BifH^I ^si^ "illlil ^l s l
^ 1 1 i s i| g^g^ | s | ssa
"S 1 J9
SCOP; ^-^ cd^
CO
CO
S rO ^ d
e e8 SO
T -a
~H "^ O ^ 'i ^ H >
a S 3 T3 ^ 3 S
. s a ^ .2 s s -^
s - - =
I
I -5 -5 -5 ^ & ^
441114 | a
CO PH 5 DQ PL|
42
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
ACTIVE.
PASSIVE.
Ama
love thou
Am are
be thou loved
Amate
love ye
Amarnini
be ye loved
Mone
advise tliou
Monere
be thou advised
Monete
advise ye
Monemini
be ye advised
Kege
rule tliou
Eegere
be thou ruled
Eegite
rule ye
Eegimini
be ye ruled
Audi
hear thou
Audire
be thou heard
Audite
hear ye Audimini
be ye heard
FUTURE SIMPLE.
Amato
thou must love Amator
thou must be loved
Amato
he must love
Amator
he must be loved
Amatote
ye must love
Amanto
they must love
Amantor
they must be loved
Moneto
thou must advise
Monetor
thou must be advised
Moneto
he must advise
Monetor
he must be advissd
Monetote
ye must advise
Monento
they must advise
Moneutor
they must be advised
Eegito
thou must rule
Eegitor
thou must be ruled
Eegito
he must rule
Eegitor
he must be ruled
Kegitote
ye must rule
Kegunto
they must rule
Eeguntor
they must be ruled
Audito
they must hear
Auditor
thou must be heard
Audito
he must hear
Auditor
he must be heard
Auditote
ye must hear
Audiunto
they must hear.
Audiuntrr
they must be heard
THE REGULAR VERBS.
43
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
ACTIVE.
Amare
Amavisse
Amaturus esse
Monere
Monuisse
Moniturus esse
Eegere
Kexisse
Kecturus esse
Audire
Audivisse
Auditurus esse
to love
to have loved
to be about to love
to advise
to have advised
to be about to advise
to rule
to have ruled
to be about to rule
to hear
to have heard
to be about to hear
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
Present and Imperfect
Perfect and Pluperfect
Future
PASSIVE.
Amari
Amatus esse
Amatum iri
Moneri
Monitus esse
Monitum iri
Regi
Eectus esse
Kectum iri
Audiri
Auditus esse
Anditum iri
to be loved
to have been loved
to be about to be loved
to be advised
to have been advised
to be about to be advised
to be ruled
to have been ruled
to be about to be ruled
to be heard
to have been heard
to be about to be heard
44
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMEE.
GEEUNDS, SUPINES, PAETICIPLES.
There are three Gerunds :
There are four Participles:
1. Ending in dum.
2. Ending in di.
ACTIVE.
3. Ending in do.
Present in ans or ens.
Future in rus.
N. A. Amandum loving
G. Amandi of loving.
PASSIVE.
D. A. Amando for or by loving
Perfect in us.
N. A. Monendum advising
Participle in dus, Gerundive.
G. Monendi of advising
D. A. Monendo for, by, advising
ACTIVE.
N. A. Eegendum ruling
G. Eegendi of ruling
Amans loving
Amaturus about to love
D. A. Eegendo for or by ruling
Monens advising
N. A. Audiendum hearing
Moniturus about to advise
G. Audiendi of hearing
Eegens ruling.
D. A. Audiendo for or by hear-
Eecturus about to rule
ing
Audiens hearing
There are two Supines :
Auditurus about to hear
1. Supine in um.
2. Supine in u.
PASSIVE.
Amatus loved
Amatum to love
Amandus meet to be loved
Amatu to be loved
Monitus advised.
Monendus meet to be advised
Monitum to advise
Monitu to be advised
Eectus ruled
Eegendus meet to be ruled
Eectum to rule
Eectu to be ruled.
Auditus heard
Audiendus meet to be heard.
Auditum to hear
Auditu to be heard.
THE IRREGULAR VERBS.
IRREGULAR OR ANOMALOUS VERBS.
The following Verbs are called Irregular or Anomalous,
Possum I am able.
Volo I am willing.
Nolo I am unwilling.
Malo I am more willing.
Fero / bear.
Fio I am made.
Eo. I go.
IEEEGULAE VEEBS CONJUGATED,
1st Pers. Pres.
Possum Volo Nolo
Malo
2nd Pers. Pres.
Potes Vis Nonvis
Mavis
Inf.
Posse Velle Nolle
MaUe
Perf.
Potui Volui Nolui
Malui
Gerund in dum
Volendum . Nolendum -\
Malendum -\
di
Volendi ( Nolendi >
Malendi >
do
Volendo ) Nolendo *
Malendo )
Supine in urn
u
Part. Pres.
Volens Nolens
Malens
Fut.
1st Pers. Pres.
Fero Fio
Eo
2nd Pers. Pres.
Fers Fis
Is
Inf.
Ferre Fieri
Ire
Perf.
Tuli Factus sum
Ivi
Gerund in dum
Ferendum -\
Eundum}
di
Ferendi f
Eundi f
do
Ferendo )
Eundo '
Supine in urn
Latum ")
Itum")
u
Latu )
Itu )
Part. Pres.
Ferens ")
lens (euntis) "j
Fut.
Laturus )
Iturus '
46
KEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
'S fl ci
*S .S * "^
I I I I 1
II
S J 43
o o
g'S
II
c '+2
+3 co
e .5 .3 .3 5
S o o o o o
^ PH PH PH PH PH
J2 J -3 ^J
'-3
o o o
PH PH PH
, I 3 fi
3 S
o o -o
PH PH PH
02
*S '5
S W
3 '43
a *
S
O O
PH PH
ss
a -
0) O) 0) O O3
"o "o "o "o "o
PH PH PL, PH PH
O2 PH
__ l|
"o [o 'o [o [o 'o
a ~
Pn
2 2 o
ll 2
13^1
1
. .2 .13 .1 I .1
o o o
a i. ! i 1
O to to f3 co 3
CO O) OJ CO O) 03
. O "S "S O "S '
od
PH PH PH PH
Pi
"3 .2 3 'o 3 *3
02 PH"
S2
-T3
B*A
.2 "3 S 3 "S
I ^o I
5zi Jz; ^ K & &
02
THE IRREGULAR VERBS.
pa^uud are pens 'saS-ed O.M4 OQUI sasaej
o? aepjo jo )no ^nd eaB 03^ jo sasua^ eseqit *ij*|
KJ
e
K) Kl K]
,0 IS lo rO
f^ Ss K*, H
02 PH*
^i
SS
1 1
Conjunc
osset
ossem
Pos
Pos
Pos
Pos
Pos
Poss
us
atis
rant
Potera
Poteras
Poterat
Potera
Potera
Potera
S.
a
CO _ta
- "
,
r m Ql 'm ""oi Q.) Q>
.
PR 1x4
s
CQ
i 1 1 -s
' -
a -5
CQ
o3 cfl c3 c3 c3
PH
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
Present.
Noli Nollte
Fer Ferte
Fi Fite
I Ite
IMPEKATIVE MOOD.
Future.
Nollto Nolito Nolitote
Ferto Fertote
Ferto
Ito
Ito
Itote
Nolunto
Ferunto
Eunto
INFINITITE MOOD.
Present and Imperfect.
Posse to be able
Velle to be willing
Nolle to be unwilling
Malle to be more willing
Ferre to bear
Fieri to be made
Ire to go
Perfect and Pluperfect.
Potuisse to have been able
Voluisse to have been willing
Noluisse to have been unwilling
Malluisse to have been more, etc.
Tulisse to have borne
Ivisse to have gone
DEPONENT VERBS.
There are some verbs called Deponent from de audpono, I
lay aside, or lay down, which lay aside the Active Form.
They may be variously described :
1. They mostly look like a Passive Verb, but are not ;
2. They are partly Active, and partly Passive ;
3. They have, chiefly, a Passive Form and an Active meaning.
Thus Venor, to hunt, looks like a Passive Verb, but as the
meaning is I hunt, and not I am hunted, it may be known
to be Deponent.
Deponent Verbs take no particular case after them. Some
are Active, and are followed by the Accusative case, as Vereor,
I fear; or by some other case, as Utor, I use, which takes
an Ablative ; Misereor, I pity, which takes a Genitive. Some
also are Intransitive, and take no case, as Morior, I die.
DEPONENT VERBS.
49
In conjugating a Deponent Verb, it will be seen that they
also take of the nature of an Active Verb by having Gerunds
and Supines.
They also have four Participles, two (Pres. and Fut.) Active
in form and sense; one (Perf.) Passive in form, but generally
Active in sense ; and the Gerundive.
Particular notice must be taken of the meaning of the
Perfect Participle of a Deponent Verb, venatus, verltus, usus,
partltus, the English of which, is, liaving hunted, having feared,
having used, having divided ; whereas if it were the Passive
Participle of an Active Verb it would be hunted, having been
hunted, etc. There is indeed no such convenient Latin Par-
ticiple as having loved, having advised, etc., in Active Verbs.
DEPONENT VERBS CONJUGATED.
1st Pers. Pres.
2nd Pers. Pres.
Inf. Pres.
1st Conj.
(To hunt.)
Venor
Venaris
Venari
2nd Conj
(To fear.)
Vereor
Vereris
Vereri
3rd Conj.
(To use.)
Utor
Uteris
Uti
4th Conj.
(To divide.)
Partior
Partiris
Partlri
Perf.
Venatus sum Veritus sum
Usus sum
Partltus sum
Ger. in duna
Venandum
-^
Verendum
-^
Utendum
")
Partiendum j
di
Venandi
Verendi
Utendi
Partiendi
do
Venando
5
Verendo
5
Utendo
5
Partiendo )
Gerundive
Venandus
Verendus
Utendus
Partiendus
Supine in um
Venatum
]
Veritum
\
Usum
\
Partltum ")
)> 11
Venatu
j
Veritu
j
Usu
j
Partitu j
Part. Pres.
Venans
*\
Verens
-x
Utens
^
Partiens ^
Perf.
Venatus
\
Veritus
I
Usus
I
Partltus ?
Fut.
Venaturus
)
Veriturus
)
Usurus
j
Partiturus '
SHORTER FORM.
1st Pers. Pres.
Venor
Vereor
Utor
Partior
Inf. Pres.
Venari
Vereri
Uti
Partiri
Part. Perf.
Venatus
Veritus
Usus
Partltus
Gerundive
Venandus
Verendus
Utendum
Partiendus
D
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
s
H o
B * *
-d ^j ^i
1
2 2 2
B * ^
>. v
a
M
S ss>
1 5 5
'3
)O 'S
s 1
S
1
P P
P P P
2S/1
1
*J*
1
ft tt
:
*. ?
o >> "^ e e
S | i ^ \ s &
* -5 s
S 5
S S -S 5
t -s* t S
s & s >>
H H *i ,5; g ?s> "S
^
H
*^
K
p __ ^
g
I f g
8 i
n '3 n
>1 1 1 1
n ^ ^2 S S "S
)0> I0>
Id) I0> IOJ O)
P P P P P P
S !
P P
)O )O )O> )OJ
P P P P
1
asn
X
Buisn
* s
. 1 s s *
ft a ^ s ^ 5 s a>
* u ,8
^ ?s 3 5s 1
1 1
1
S 1 S
"i *vj f< 5* ^i -s^
^ **
r 1 >> 'S
S -
SoT
H *2
5*
'2
o ^ ^ -a ,S
M ,2 n >3 >S -3
g , ^ s a a g
l ~l -U !2 ^3 ^ ^3 -4-=>
P P P P P P
h '? >l 1 a 1
>~S 103 igj '33 lS S
P P P P P P
Utebar,
Uteba-ri
irt '=3 icS c3
7 T fS T
P P P P
DQ S
od S
CQ
S
omox tueiHa
aidung W n,nj
popodmi
THE VERB " UTOR. 1
51
> )CU ^5 * J 2 **
tj s 1 a! < s .-r o *" s
& & >S 2 rg r3 r^ -J ' t3
n M ^- |C *ddfl^' <a
g * a -I a J J J I S- *
GPPP ppppp
's?
co"
1
m 'P
P P
p p
GO
ft .S
CM ^d +-(
^ w M
1 1
PH
^ -<
CQ CO CQ 'tO 'S 'S3
P P P P P P
1 s 1 3
1 J 5
S $3
S S E3 .^ .PH ._
CQ CO CQ 00 CO CO
p p p p p p
i "2 'S "S
1 S I B a
a *= >g CO" -ta
g )g 5 J S g
TO co co co 0> DQ
no CO CQ CO OQ CO
P P P P P P
02 PM'
p-*& ^5 ^o
I
p p p p p P
OQ PW
>S >S g 'g- g
DQ CQ CO )CP ) )
III I P P
02 PM
52 NEW EASY LATIN PEIMEK.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Impersonal Verbs are those which have no Personal Pro-
noun as Subject, and are used only in the Third Person
Singular (Ind. and Conj.) and in the Infinitive Mood.
It hails, grandinat. It vexes me, me piget.
The greater number of the Impersonal Verbs are. of the
second conjugation. We give those most commonly used.
CONJUGATION I.
Delectat, it delights. Tonat, it thunders.
Juvat, it delights. Fulgurat, it lightens.
Constat, it is evident. Grandinat, it hails.
CONJUGATION II.
Oportet, it behoves. Pudet, it shames. Licet, it is lawful.
Decet, it becomes. Pcenitet, it repents. Liquet, it is clear.
Dedecet, it is unseemly. Tsedet, it disgusts. Attiuet, it relates.
Piget, it irks. Miseret, it moves pity. Pertinet, it belongs.
Libet, it pleases.
CONJUGATION III.
Accidit, it happens. Plait, it rains.
Contingit, it befalls. Lucescit, it dawns.
Ningit, it snows. Vesperascit, it grows late.
CONJUGATION IV.
Convenit, it suits. Evenit, it turns out. Expedit, it is expedient.
IRREGULAR.
Interest, it imports. Kcfert, it concerns.
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 53
The Impersonal Verbs may be arranged also according to
the case they are constructed with. The following are used
with the Accusative Case
Decet. Oportet.
Dedecet. Piget.
Delectat. Poenitet.
Juvat. Pudet.
Miseret. . Tsedet.
The following are used with the Dative Case
Libet. Accidit. Convenit.
Licet. Contingit. Expedit.
Evenit.
Some of these Impersonal Verbs, however, are constructed
with ad and the Accusative, e.g. attineb and pertinet, while
others, in addition to an Accusative of the person, have a Geni-
tive as well, as piget, pudet, etc. So we may sum up the case-
construction of these Impersonal Verbs thus :
Those which require
a. Accusative of Object : oportet, decet, etc.
5. Dative of the Object : libet, licet, etc.
c. Ad with Accusative : attinet, pertinet, etc.
d. A Genitive with an Accusative, piget, pudet, etc.
To these we may add interest and refert, which admit a
Genitive unless it is necessary to use a pronoun ; when, in
place of the Genitive, we use mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra,
agreeing with re. 129 (III. a).
The Impersonals
Fulgurat, it lightens, Pluifc, it rains, Vesperascit, it gets late,
Tonat, it thunders, Grandinat, it hails, Ningit, it snows,
Luscescit, it dawns,
are of course not used with any Personal or other Object.
54 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Irregular or Anomalous Verbs (see pp. 45-48) are those
which have for the most part the usual tenses, but are irre-
gular as regards the formation of some of these tenses ; as
Possum, I am able.
Volo, I am willing.
Nolo, I am unwilliny..
Malo, I prefer.
Fero, I bear.
Fio, lam made.
Eo, I go.
Queo, I am able.
But Defective Verbs are those which want some of the usual
parts of a Verb, and may be divided into
1. Those which have no Tenses derived from the Present
stem, though they have the English of the Present ; as
Ccepi, I have begun (Present-Past)
Odi, I hate.
Memini, I remember.
2. Those which have Perfect without Supine, and those which
iave neither Perfect nor Supine; as, Tremo, J tremble,
which has no Supine, and Mitesco, I grow mild, which
has no Perfect or Supine.
3. Verbs defective in various forms; as
Aio, 7 say. Inquam, I say.
QUEOSO, I entreat. Fari, to speak.
Imperatives: Apage, begone; cedo,give liere; have, salve, Ji ail;
age, come ; vale, farewell.
QUASI-PASSIVE AND SEMI-DEPONENT YERBS. 55
QUASI-PASSIVE AND SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS.
Quasi-Passive Verbs are those which unite an Active form
with a Passive meaning ; as
Exulo, I am banished.
Fio, I am made.
Liceo, I am put to auction.
Vapulo, I am beaten.
Veneo, I am on sale.
SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS
(1) are, first, those which have an Active Present but a
Perfect of Passive form (Active meaning) ; as
Audeo, I dare. Perfect, Ansus sum, I dared.
Fido, I trust. ,, Fisus sum, I trusted.
Gaudeo, I rejoice. ,, Gavisus sum, I rejoiced.
Soleo, I am wont. Solitus sum, I was wont.
(2) Those which have an Active Perfect with Deponent
Perfect Principle; as
Present. Perfect. Perfect Participle.
Juro, I swear. Juravi, I swore. Juratus, having sworn.
Ceno, I sup. Cenavi, I supped. Cenatus, having supped.
Prandeo, I dine. Prandi, I dined. Pransus, having dined.
So nupta, wedded; potus, having drunk, and some others.
56
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
DERIVED VERBS.
Derived Verbs are divided into
1. Frequentative. 2. Inceptive. 3. Desiderative.
1. Frequentative Verbs express repeated or intenser action,
and are of the First Conjugation, and end in to or so, or
it o t it or.
The principal Frequentative Verbs are :
Canto sing.
Capto catch up.
fCurso run hither & thither.
Cursito run hither & thither.
Clamito cry aloud.
Dicto say often.
Dictito say often.
Gesto lear
These are all conjugated regularly ; -are, -avi, -atum, except those
marked f> which have no perfect or supine ; but
Minitor, -an, -atus sum, is deponent.
2. Inceptive Verbs (sometimes called Inchoative) express
beginning of action, and are of the Third Conjugation,
and end in asco or esco ; as
Labasco, I begin to totter.
Pallesco, I turn pale.
Puerasco, I become a boy.
Mitesco, I become mild.
3. Desiderative Verbs express desire of action, and are of the
Fourth Conjugation, and end in urio ; as
Esurio, I am hungry, wish to eat.
Parturio, I am in labour, wish to produce.
Haesito
stick fast.
Lectito
gather often.
Merso
dip in.
Minitor
threaten.
Pulso
strike.
fBogito
ask often.
Salto
dance.
fVentito
come often.
ADVERBS. 57
ADVERBS.
There are four kinds of Adverbs
1. Adverbs of place.
2. Adverbs of time.
3. Adverbs of number.
4. Adverbs of description.
1. Adverbs of place answer the questions
1. Ubi, where ? 4. Unde, whence ?
2. Quo, whither ? 5. Qua, which way ?
3. Quorsum, whithenvard ? 6. Quatenus, quousque, how far ?
2. Adverbs of time answer the questions
1. Quando, ubi, when ? 2. Quamdiu, how long ?
3. Adverbs of number answer the question
Quoties, how often ?
4. Adverbs of description express
manner quality quantity.
Many Adverbs are derived from Adjectives, and end in
e, ter ; as
Pulchre, finely. Fortiter, bravely.
Misere, wretchedly. Sapienter, wisely.
N.B. Adverbs of negation are non, haud, not.
58
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PREPOSITIONS.
There are three classes of Prepositions
1. Those which are followed by the Accusative Case.
2. Those which are followed by the Ablative.
3. Those which are followed by the Ace. and Abl.
1, Prepositions followed by the Accusative Case
Ad, to, at
Ante, before
Apud, at, in, among
Circum, around
Circa, circiter, about
Cis, citra, on the near side of
Contra, against, over against
Erga, towards (of the feelings)
Extra, outside of t out of
Infra, below
Inter, between, among, amid
Intra, within
Juxta, adjoining to, beside
Ob, over against, by reason of
Penes, in the power of
Per, through
Pone, behind
Post, after, behind
Prseter, beside
Prope, near ; propius, proximo
Propter, nigh, on account of
Secundum, next, along, according
Supra, above [to
Trans, across
Ultra, beyond
Versus, versum, toivards
2. Prepositions followed by the Ablative Case
A, ab, abs, by or from
Absque, without
Clam, witliout the knowledge of
Coram, in the presence of
Cum, with
De, down from, from, concerning
Ex, e, out of, from
Palam, in sight of [with
PraB, before, owing to, compared
Pro, before, for, instead of
Sine, without
Terms, reaching to, as far as
3. Prepositions followed by the Accusative or Ablative
In, into, against (Ace.)
In, in, upon, among (Abl.)
Sub, up to, under (Ace.)
Sub, under (Abl.)
Super, over, upon
Subter, under
In and sub, with Accusative, imply motion; with Ablative, rest.
CONJUNCTIONS. 59
CONJUNCTIONS.
There are two kinds of Conjunctions
1. Co-ordinative. 2. Sub-ordinative.
1. Co-ordinative are those which join words and sentences
together, but do not affect mood ; as
Et, que, ac, atque, and.
Aut, vel, ve, either, or.
Sed, autem, but.
Nam, enim, /or, etc., etc.
2 Snb-ordinative are those which join sentences, influencing
mood ; as
Ut, that. Quum, when, since.
Ne, lest. Si, if.
^ I because. Nisi, tinfew.
Quia \
INTERJECTIONS.
An interjection is used to express pleasure, pain, astonishment,
etc., and is used with different cases.
May be used with a Nominative,
Vocative, or Accusative Case.
0, O I oh !
A, ah, alas !
Eheu, lieu, alas !
Pro, proh, forbid it !
En ") , , , , , , ; C May be used with Nominative or
Ecce j | Accusative.
Hei,atoM M b
YSB, woe I \
60
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PKOSODY.
GENERAL RULES FOR THE QUANTITIES OF LATIN WORDS.
The following are LONG :
1. A vowel before two consonants ; as,
jdctdntes.
2. A vowel before a double consonant
or a j in_same word j as, felix,
Amazon, Ajax.
3. Diphthongs; as, menses, pauca, pcerice,
Teucri, h~i.
4. Datives and ablatives singular and
plural when they end in a, as, i, o,
u, is (and e of the 5th declension) j
as, mensd, mensce, lapidi, gradul,
melion, domino, 'bond, gradu, men-
sis, dominls, facie.
5. Accusatives plural, unless they end
SHORT.
1. One vowel before another vowel in
the same word is short, as via-,
but diei, flo are long, and fidei,
iUttM are common.
2. All cases in a except ablative of the
first declension and its .corre-
sponding adjectives; as, mensd,
bond.
COMMON.
Syllables are sometimes common
(i.e. long or short) when a vowel
in the same word stands before
two consonants, of which the first
is a mute and the second is a
liquid (7, r) ; as duplex, latebra.
The last syllable but one (penultimate) of a three-syllable or four-syllable word
may be marked long or short (- w) as the pupil hears his tutor pronounce it, or as
he himself may know; as, laplde, operibus, domtnus, amdbam.
N.B. This is a very useful rule for all common words which the pupil is familiar
with. He marks the penultimate long or short directly he hears it pronounced in
dictation, or because, having heard it again and again, he is quite sure of the
quantity.
To see how these few general rules work we subjoin a couplet marked according
to these rules and these rules only and we find that we have the quantities of
considerably more than half the syllables.
Quascunque aspicles, lacrymse f ecere, lituras ;
Sed tamen et lacrymge pondera vocis habent.
II.
THE LONG AND SHORT TERMINATIONS WITH PRINCIPAL EXCEPTIONS.
LONG.
a, i, o, ucas, es, os.
a is long, as frustra ; but
1. Puta, ita, quia, ejS, are short,
2. All cases in a are short as men set,
opertt, except the ablative of the
first declension, as inensa.
I is long, as domini; but
1. Nisi, quasi are short.
2. Some dative and vocative cases of
Greek nouns are short, as Chlorl.
3. Mihl, tibl, sibl, ubl, ibl, have the i
common.
PROSODY.
61
5 is long, as domino j but
eg6, modo, citS, duo, sci6, nesci6, are
short putO, common.
u is long, as tu, genu.
c is long, as ac, hie (here) ; but
1. Nee, donee, fac, are short.
2. Hie (he, this) is common.
as
as is long, as musas ; but-
Greek cases in as of third declension, as
Pallas, lampadas(|icc.), are short, and
anas (a duck).
es is long, as hostes ; but
1. Some words in es increasing short in
the gen. are short comes, coml-
tis; but though increasing short
w abies, aries, Ceres, pes,are long.
2. Es from sum and its compounds are
short, and penes and some Greek
plurals, as Troade's.
os is long, as gladi5s ; but some Greek
words are short, as Argos, Delos, and
6s, ossis (a bone), and compos.
SHORT.
, yb, <*, t, I, r, n is, ys, us.
3. aether, aer, because derived from
e is short, as regg ; but
1. Imperatives of second conjugation ;
as, mone ;
2. Ablatives of the fifth declension, as
die;
3. Adverbs derived from adjectives in
us, as operose, are long. Bene
and male are however short.
4. Monosyllables in e (except the en-
clitics que, n6, v8) are long; as,
me, te, se, de, e, ne.
5. Quare, hodie, fere, ferme, ohe, are
long.
6. Cave and cave are both used.
7. Fame, abl. of fames, is long.
b, d, t, y
are short, as ab, sed, 8t, amat, chely'.
I
is short, as Hannibal; but nil, sal, sol,
are long nihil, common.
a!0jjp, aTjp, are long.
n is short, as tegmgn; but in many
Greek words, such as Hymen, it is long.
is, ys
?s is short, as duMs ; but
1. Datives and ablatives in is, as
dommis ;
2. Sis, from sum, and its compound
possls,
3. Vis, from volo, and its compound,
vis, strength ;
4. Second per. sing, of the pres. of the
fourth conjugation, as audis, also
malls, noils, veils, are long, ys is
short, as chely s.
us
Us is short, as dominus ; but
1. Words increasing long in the geni-
tive, as juventus, salus, senectus ;
2. The monosyllables crus, thus ;
3. The us of the fourth declension,
except Nona, and Yoc. Singular,
are long.
r is short, as vlr ; but
1. Lar, Nar, ver, fur, cur.
2. Par with its compounds dispar, etc.
Syllables that cannot be marked by the help of this Table and by the General
Rules already given must be looked out in Dictionary or Gradus ; as for instanca
the first syllable of words such as quoque, generd, gradus, etc.
62
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
EPITOME.
There are
8 Parts of Speech.
2 Numbers.
3 Genders.
6 Cases.
5 Declensions (Substantives).
3 Classes of Adjectives.
8 Kinds of Pronouns.
4 Conjugations of Verbs.
2 Voices.
4 Moods.
EIGHT PARTS OF SPEECH :
1. Substantive")
I
4. Verb )
5. Adverb
6. Prepositi
7. Conjunct
8. Interjecti
rb )
>sition f
inction C
jectiony
undeclined.
Six CASES,
with their signs in English.
No sign.
0.
No sign.
Of.
To or for.
1. Nominative,
2. Vocative,
3. Accusative,
4. Genitive,
5. Dative,
6. Ablative,
In, with, from,
by.
FIVE DECLENSIONS OF SUB-
STANTIVES.
1. 83. Gen. 3. is.
2. i. 4. us.
5. ei.
6 Tenses.
3 Persons.
Singular. I, thou, he.
Plural. Them, you, they.
3 Gerunds.
2 Supines.
4 Participles.
4 Kinds of Adverbs.
3 Classes of Prepositions.
2 Kinds of Conjunctions.
Two NUMBERS:
1. Singular, as mensa, a table.
2. Plural, as mensas, tables.
THREE GENDERS :
1. Masculine.
2. Feminine.
3. Neuter.
THREE CLASSES OF ADJECTIVES
1. Those which have in the
Nominative three termina-
tions :
us, a, um, as Bonus, a, urn.
er, a, um, as Tener, tenera, teneruw.
er, is, e, as Ace?*, acrt's, acre.
2. Those which have two.
is, e, as Trisfa's, triste.
or, us, as Melior, melius.
3. Those which have one.
Felix, ingens, prsestans.
PRONOUNS.
PRONOUNS.
There are 8 Kinds of
Pronouns :
1. Personal.
2. Reflexive.
3. Possessive.
4. Demonstrative.
5. Definitive.
6. Kelative.
7. Interrogative.
8. Indefinite.
1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS :
1. Ego, I.
2. Tu, thou (you).
Plur.
3. Nos, we.
4. Vos, you, ye.
2. REFLEXIVE:
Se (sese), himself, herself, itself,
themselves.
3. POSSESSIVE:
1. Meus, mine.
2. Tuus, thine, your.
3. Suns, his, hers, etc.
4. Cujus, whose.
5. Noster, ours.
6. Vester, yours.
4. DEMONSTRATIVE :
1. Is, that, he, she, it.
2. Hie, this (near me).
3. Ille, that (yonder).
4. Iste, that (near you).
5. DEFINITIVE:
1. Idem, same. 2. Ipse,seZ/.
6. RELATIVE:
Qui, who or which.
7. INTERROGATIVE:
Quis, who or what ?
8. INDEFINITE :
Quis (aliquis), any one.
Verbs have
VERBS.
4 Conjugations.
2 Voices.
4 Moods.
6 Tenses.
6 Persons.
3 Singular.
3 Plural.
3 Gerunds.
2 Supines.
4 Participles.
FOUR CONJUGATIONS
Known by the endings of the
Infinitive Mood :
1. Has a long before re.
2. Has e long before re.
3. Has e short before re.
4. Has i long before re.
Two VOICES:
1. Active.
2. Passive.
FOUR MOODS:
1. Indicative.
2. Conjunctive.
3. Imperative.
4. Infinitive.
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMEE.
Six TENSES :
1. Present.
2. Future Simple.
3. Imperfect.
4. Perfect.
5. Future Perfect.
6. Pluperfect.
THEEE PERSONS :
Singular. I, thou (you),
Plural We, ye (you),
he.
they.
THREE GERUNDS :
1. Ending in dum.
2. Ending in di.
3. Ending in do.
Two SUPINES :
1. Supine in um.
2. Supine in u.
FOUR PARTICIPLES :
1. Present in ans or ens.
2. Participle in dus.
3. Perfect in us.
4. Future in rus.
PARTICLES.
The four Parts of Speech which are undeclined are :
1. Adverb. 2. Conjunction.
3. Preposition. 4. Interjection.
4 KINDS OF ADVERBS :
1. Adverbs of Place. 2. Adverbs of Time.
3. Adverbs of Number. 4. Adverbs of Description.
3 CLASSES OF PREPOSITIONS :
1. Those which are followed by the Accusative case.
2. Those which are followed by the Ablative.
3. Those which are followed by the Accusative and Ablative.
2 KINDS OF CONJUNCTIONS :
1. Co-ordinative. 2. Sub-ordinative.
INTERJECTIONS
are particles of exclamation, and are not classed or divided except
as regards the cases they are used with.
END OF PART I.
PART II. SYNTAX.
6
PART II. SYNTAX.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
1.
Simple Sentence . . . 69-71
15.
2.
Four General Eules . . 72
3.
Verb and its Nominative . 73
4.
Adjective and Substantive 74
16.
5.
A.pi3ositioii T5
6.
Relative and Antecedent . 75
7.
Verb and its Accusative . 77
8.
Nominative after Verb . . 78
9.
Genitive after Verb ... 79
17.
10.
Dative after Verb ... 80
18.
11.
Ablative after Verb ... 81
19.
12.
Verbs which take Two
20.
Cases 82
91
1. Ace. and Genitive.
&LI
22.
2. Ace. and Dative.
23.
13.
Verbs which take either of
24.
Two Cases 83
25.
1. Gen. or Accusative.
26.
2. Gen. or Ablative.
27.
14.
Verbs which take a Double
28.
Case 83
29.
1. Two Accusatives Person and
30.
Thing.
31.
2. Two Accusatives Object and
32.
Complement.
3. Two Datives Sum with other
33.
words.
34.
PAGB
Adjectives and Their Cases 84
1. Gen. after Adjective.
2. Dative after Adjective.
3. Ablative after Adjective.
Different Uses of Cases
1. Nominative 86
2. Accusative. 86
3. Genitive . 87
4. Dative . . 87
5. Ablative. . 88
Locative Case 89
Ablative Absolute ... 90
" Quam " after the Comp. 92
Sequence of Tenses . . 93
Infinitive Mood .... 94
Gerunds 95
Supines 95
Participles 96
The Gerundive .... 98
Accusative and Infinitive
(Enunciatio Obliqua) . . 100
" That," and " Ut " . . 102
Oblique Statement . . .104
" Qui " 104
Subjunctive Mood . . .105
Impersonal Verbs . . . 106
Asking Questions . . . 108
Pronouns 110
Prepositions 112
67
PART II. SYNTAX,
A SIMPLE SENTENCE.
THE simplest sentence that can be framed contains a single thought
only; as
Puer amat. Puer amatur.
The boy loves. The boy is loved.
That of which or of whom something is said is called the subject, as,
" the boy " ; and that which is said of the subject is called the predicate
(from prcedico, to assert), as " loves," " is loved."
We cannot indeed speak without having a subject to speak about, and
we cannot frame a sentence without saying something concerning that
subject.
The subject in the simplest sentence is always the Nominative Case,
and that which is said about the subject called the predicate is the
Verb.
Now this Subject or Nominative case may be either
1. A Substantive.
2. An Adjective used as a Substantive.
3. A Pronoun.
4. An Infinitive Mood.
5. A Clause.
1. Puer amat. The boy loves.
2. Omnes amant vitam. All men love life.
3. Nos amamus. We love.
4. Amare est jucundum. To love is pleasant.
5. Amare patriam est decorum. To love one's country is honourable.
A simple sentence may, however, consist of a single word only because
if a Pronoun is the subject the latter is implied in the ending of the Verb,
as amamus, "we love," not necessarily nos amamus.
But a simple sentence, though not the simplest sentence, may consist
of more than a subject and verb by the introduction of what is called an
object; as for example in our simplest sentence, " The boy loves," if we
69
70 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
wish to say whom or what the boy loves, we must add an object, which
will generally be in the Accusative, as
Puer amat matrem.
The boy loves his mother.
Thus we see that a simple sentence may consist of (1) a Subject, (2) a
Verb, or Predicate, (3) an Object.
Of course any of these three elements may be extended ; e.g. we may add
1. An Adjective (say bonus) to puer ;
2. An Adverb (say valde) to amat ;
3. An Adjective (say car am) to matrem : as
Bonus puer valde amat caram matrem.
The good boy greatly loves his dear mother.
These Adjectives bonus and caram are called epithets (from two Greek
words, CTTI Ti6t)[ju, " epi," on to, and "tithemi," I place), and qualify (or
attribute some quality to) each of the Substantives, and hence are said
to be in attribution to them.
Valde is an Adverb (i.e. something added to the Verb) and qualifies
the Verb amat . The Adverb frequently increases or lessens the force of
the Verb. Instead, however, of valde we might have had an adverbial
egression, as magno studio (with great affection) :
Bonus puer amat magno studio caram matrem,
Note that the Object is so generally in the Accusa-
tive case that we speak of the Accusative or Object.
We have already learned that most Verbs take the Accusative after
them, but we have also learned that some take other cases ; as
(a) Puer potitur pecunise (gen.).
The boy gains possession of money.
(b) Puer paret matri (dat.).
The boy obeys his mother.
A SIMPLE SENTENCE.
(c) Puer utitur cultro (abl.).
The boy uses his knife.
We can extend a sentence also by putting in some other Substantives
which refer to the Substantives we already have, and these second Sub-
stantives are then said to be in apposition.
dux amat Acbaten comitem.
JEneas the leader loves Achates his attendant.
Here dux is in apposition to &neas, and comitem in apposition to
Achaten.
Again : instead of a single we sometimes have a double object. One is
then called the nearer object, and is put in the Accusative case, the other
the remoter object, and is put in the Dative ; as
Puer dat librum matri.
The boy gives a book to his mother.
These remarks do not apply to the Verbs which are called Copulative
from copula, a link, as
Puer est bonus. The boy is good.
Puer fit vir. The boy becomes a man.
Vir nascitur poeta. The man is born a poet.
For in these sentences the word linked or joined to the subject and com-
pleting the sense, is called the complement (or completion), both copula
and complement forming the predicate.
PBEDICATE.
Subject. Copula. Complement.
Vir. Nascitur. Poeta.
Of course the ways of enlarging a simple sentence might be multiplied
in a greater degree.
*#* Reference is made in the following pages to the Public
School Latin Primer Rules. This is the meaning of the figures
that follow each rule. The more important of these rules are
also given in full in Latin and English in parallel columns
on pp. 192-206.
FOUR GENERAL RULES,
A.
A FINITE Verb agrees with its Nominative Case
in Number and Person. 88.
Rex pugnat. Nospugnamus.
Reges pugnant. Etc., etc., etc.
B.
An Adjective agrees with its Substantive in
Gender, Number, and Case. 89.
Fortis rex "hsibet peritum ducem.
c.
A Substantive is put in the same Case as that
with which it is in apposition. 90.
Rex,fortis vir, pugnat. Bex vincit ducem, fortem virum.
Filius regis, sapientis viri, pugnat.
I).
A Eelative agrees with its Antecedent in everything
; i.e. in Gender, Number, and Per son. 91.
Bex, quern, regina amavit, ibat, etc.
Begina, quam rex amavit, ibat, etc.
Vidi regem qui ibat, etc.
Bex amabit te, O feraina, quce amas reginam.
72
THE VERB AND ITS NOMINATIVE OR SUBJECT.
73
THE VERB AND ITS NOMINATIVE OR SUBJECT.
I.
Every finite Verb must have
a Nominative Case as its Sub-
ject. 93.
Rex pugnat. lieges pugnant.
II.
This Nominative Case or Sub-
ject need not always be put in,
but is understood.
Pugnat (understand ille.)
Pugnant (understand illi.)
III.
The Verb must agree with its
Nom. Case or Subject in Num-
ber (Sing, or PI.) and in Per-
son (First, Second, Third). 88.
Ego pugno. Nos pugnawws.
Tu pugnas. Vos pugnafo's.
Hie pugnat Illi pugnant.
IV.
When a Pronoun (ego, tu, ille,
nos, vos, illi) is the Nominative
Case or Subject, it is only put
in for the sake of emphasis or
distinction.
Ego pugno, tu fugis.
Nos pugnaraus, vos fugitis.
But " I fight,' 1 " we flee," without any
distinction between " J" and "we,"
would be simply pug no, fugimus.
V.
Two or more Substantives of
the Singular Number will have a
Verb in the Plural Number. 92.
Rex et dux pugnant.
VI.
If the Nominative Case or Sub-
jects are of different Persons
(as Ego tu ille), the Verb (in
the Plural Number of course)
will agree with the First Per-,
son rather than with the Se-
cone/,and with the Second rather
than with the Third. 92, l.
Ego et tu pugnamus.
Tu et ille pugnatis.
VII.
Sometimes an Infinitive Mood
is the Nominative Case or Sub-
ject to a Verb, which Infinitive
Mood is then considered a Sub-
stantive in the Neuter Gender.
HO, I. 26, 4.
Mentiri est improbum.
VIII.
Sometimes a clause is the No-
minative Case or Subject ; and
this is also looked upon as a
Neuter Substantive. 156, 3.
Celare suas culpas mentiendo est im-
probum.
IX.
Though it has been stated that
all Verbs have a Nominative
Case or Subject, yet there are
Impersonal Verbs,of which more
will be said (see page 106,107)
74 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE ADJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE,
I.
The use of the Adjective is to describe the nature of the Sub-
stantive with which it goes, i.e., it " qualifies the Substantive."
II.
The Adjective (including the Participle and Adjective Pronoun,
which partake of the nature of the Adjective) agrees with the
Substantive in Gender, Number, and Case i.e., if the Substantive
be of the Masculine Gender, the Adjective must be Masculine ;
if the Substantive be of the Singular Number, the Adjective
must be Singular ; if the Substantive be in the Nominative Case,
the Adjective must be in the Nominative, &c.
Bonus rex regit civcs. Rex laudat/j/^m ducerc.
Boni reges regunt cives. Bex laudat fortes duces.
Bonus rex regit cives.
rex being Masculine, bonus is Masculine
rex being Singular, bonus is Singular
rex being Nominative, bonus is Nominative
Boni reges regunt cives.
reges beiug Masculine, boni is Masculine
reges being Plural, boni is Plural
reges being Nominative, boni is Nominative.
Eex laudat fortem ducem
ducem being Masculine, fortem is Masculine
ducem being Singular, fortem is Singular
ducem being Accusative, fortem is Accusative.
III.
If the Adjective, however, has to go with Substantives, which are
of different Genders, it agrees with the Masculine rather than
the Feminine ; but in things without life it will often be put in
the Neuter Gender. 92, 2. 92 (a.)
Hex et rcgina snnt bom.
Labor (m) et ignavia (f.) sunt dissimillima (n )
IV.
Adjectives are ofcen used by themselves as Substantives to re-
present either persons or things, 156, as
Multi, miny mei\
Multa, miny things.
Vera dicere est liouestum.
AVPOSITION. THE RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT.
75
APPOSITION.
When two Substantives come
together representing the same
thing, they are put in the same
Case. 90.
Reges, fortes viri, pugnant.
Rex amat reginam, bonam femi-
nam.
Filius regis,/oris viri, pugnat.
Rex dat ensem duci, bono viro.
Rex utitur ense, acuto telo.
But the two Substantives need
not necessarily be of the same
Number or Gender.
Tixit Thebis tnagno oppido.
Dedit regi ensem, donum reginse.
This is called Apposition
from appono, to place beside
a Substantive placed (in mean-
ing) by the side of another
Substantive.
To explain this
Reges, fortes viri, pugnant
As reges and viri are both of them
evidently the same persons referred
to put in apposition, or placed by
the side of each other they are
both of them in the same Case, the
Nominative.
Rex dat ensem duci, bono viro.
Here viro, referring to duci, is put
in the same Case as duci (Dative),
In the last sentence (Bex utitur ense,
&c.) it is very plain that telo refers
to ense; it is therefore put in the
came Case as ense (Ablative).
THE RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT.
I.
The Eel alive means the Relative
Pronoun " qui," which relates
or refers to some person or
thing mentioned before.
The Antecedent means the
person or thing mentioned be-
fore from ante, before, and
cedo, to go.
The Relative and Antecedent are
doubtless most difficult for
young boys to understand,
chiefly because, in whatever
Case the Relative Pronoun is,
it must, according to the Eng-
lish language, come before its
Verb to make sense, and be-
cause it has to be taken as near
I.
to its Antecedent as possible.
Many boys will parse
Puer fecit hoc,
The boij did this,
who will not be able to parse
Quod puer fecit,
Which the boy did,
though both contain simply a
Nominative Case, a Verb, and
an Accusative Case. They will
stumble at the latter because
they have to take the Accusa-
tive Case first.
II.
This Relative Pronoun agrees
(see p. 31). with its Antece-
dent (i. e. t the word to which
76
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
it refers) in everything but Case.
91.
Eex, qui amavit reginara, ibat, &c.
Kegina, qua amavit regem, ibat, &c.
Eeges, quos regina ainavit, ibant, &c.
Eegina, quam rex amavit, ibat, &c.
Eex amavit te, femina, quss amas
reginam.
Taking the first sentence
Res., qui amavit reginam, ibat, &c.
rex beiug Sing., qui is also Sing.
rex beiug Mas., qui is also Mas.
rex being 3rd Per., qui is also 3rd Per.
But though rex is Nom. and
qui is Nom.,<?wiis not the Nom.
because rex is, for rex is the
Nom. to the Verb ibat, and qui
is the Nom. to amavit.
Taking the fourth sentence
Regina, quam rex amavit, ibat, &c.
Regina being Fem,,quam is also Fern.
Begina being Smg.,quam is also Sing.
But reyina is Nom. and quam
is Ace., because regina is the
Nom. to the Verb ibat and
quam is the Ace. after the Verb
amavit,
in.
The Case of the Relative Pro-
noun may be any Case which
the Verb governs, as
Ensis, quern dux habet, est acutus
Paupereg, quorum boni miserentur,
sunt grati (thankful).
Morbus, cui medicus medetur, est
gravis.
Ensis, quo rex utitur, est acutus.
Eex, cui dux dat ensem, est fortis.
Eex, cujus ensis est acutus, est fortis.
Eex, a quo civitas gubernatur, est
fortis.
Milites, quibuscum dux ibat, sunt
fortes.
In the sentences given above
it will be seen that in turning
them into English the Relative
Pronoun, in whatever case it
is, is taken before its Verb,
that it may come as near to
its Antecedent the word to
which it refers as possible,
as
The sword, which the leader has, <fec.
which Ace. after has,
The poor, whom the good pity, &c.
whom Gen. after pity.
The disease, which the physician, &c.
which Dat. after heal.
The sword, which the king uses, &c.
which Abl. after uses.
Again
The king, to wliom the leader gives,
&c. to whom Dat. after gives.
The king, whose sword is sharp, &c.
whose Gen. of the possessor.
The king, by whom the state is, &c.
whom Abl. after a.
The soldiers, with whom the general,
&c.
whom Abl. after cum.
THE VERB -AND ITS ACCUSATIVE OR OBJECT.
77
THE VERB AND ITS ACCUSATIVE OR OBJECT.
I.
All ordinary Transitive Verbs
take an Accusative case after
them, which Accusative Case
is called the nearer object.
95, 96.
Eex landat ducem,
The word Transitive is made
up of two Latin words, trans,
across, and eo, to go. To our
present purpose it will signify
passing over, and it means,
when spoken of a Verb, that
the action of the Verb passes
over to the Noun which gov-
erns it.
By an ordinary Transitive Verb,
then, is meant a Verb after
which you can place some
Common Substantive to com
plete the sense, as
I touch.
This will take any such com-
mon word, as table, chair, pen,
ink, book, cat, dog, house, &c.
In other words, there is an
action in touch which passes
on to table, chair, pen, ink, &c,
II.
A Verb is call Intransitive
that is, not Transitive (in
II.
implying not) when there is no
action in the Verb to pass over
Sto, I stand.
Arbor crescit, tlie tree grows.
Avis volat, the bird flies.
Here it can be seen that stand*,
grows, flies are Intransitive, for
there is no action to pass over.
We need put no Substantive
after them to make sense.
Intransitive Verbs then (as a rule)
take no Case.
Intransitive Verbs are also
called Neuter.
The following are some com-
mon Neuter or Intransitive
Verbs
Cado, I fall. Sedeo, I sit.
Cubo, I lie down, Sto, J stand.
Curro, J run. Vivo, I live.
III.
Som.e Neuter Verbs, however,
do take an Accusative after
them, but only an Accusative
of some particular word which
is of like meaning with the
Verb.
Servio servitutem. Lndo aleam.
Vivo vitam.
This Accusative is called the
Accusative of kindred meaning.
97
78
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
Although most verbs take after
them an Accusative Case, after
some a Nominative appears, a
full list of which will be found on
p. 156 of P.S.L.P.
They are
1. Copulative Verbs.
2. The Passive of those Verbs which
in the Active are called Factitive
Verbs.
N.B. These words Copulative,
Factitive, &c. are explained, see
P.S.L.P. p. 176, and p. 75.
I.
The Copulative Verbs are
Sum, I am.
Fio, I become.
Appareo, I appear.
Existo, I stand forth.
Audio, I am called.
Maneo, I remain.
Nascor, J am born.
Videor, J seem.
Evado, I turn out.
II.
The following are the passive
of some of the principal Facti- i
live Verbs '
Habeor, I am esteemed.
Existimor. I am thought.
Nominor, J am named.
Appellor, lam called.
Dicor, J am said.
Creor, J am created.
It will be seen that after these
Verbs a Nominative appears>
which must be regarded as a
Complement, or that which
completes the sense.
Examples
fest
fit
videtur
habetur
appellatur
vocatur
dux.
Nemo nascitur sapiens.
Poeta evadit orator.
III.
When, however, the Copulative
Verb is in the Infinitive, and is
preceded by an Accusative, its
Complement will also be in the
Accusative.
( es? v e )
Dicunt regem \ & e * 1 rducem.
( vocari )
Dicunt poetam evadere oratorem.
The Latin Primer Rule for
this is: "Copulative Verbs,
whether finite or infinite, gene-
rally have a Complement agree-
ing with the Subject ;" but this
requires some such explanation
as we have given above.
THE GENITIVE AFTER THE VEEB.
79
THE GENITIVE AFTER THE VERB.
I.
Some Verbs are followed by
the Genitive Sum when it
signifies 127 (b)
Nature Function Token Duty
ITomirus est (it is the nature) eirare.
Eegis est (it is the duty} imperare
recte
II.
Interest, it imports. Refert, it
concerns. 129.
Regis interest regere recte.
Kegt's ref ert regere recte.
III.
Verbs of Accusing, Acquitting,
Condemning, Warning, &c.
133.
These, as well as a Genitive case of
the chaige, take an Accusative of the
Ubjtct (seep. 12;.
/ accusat ducem ignavice.
I cotderanat ducem multo?'tt??&
sceltrwm.
Kex
I absolvit ducem ignavice.
I admouet ducem
* fortunes.
rv.
pristine
Many Verbs of Abounding,
Wanting, Enriching, Depriv-
ing (and ako Potior). 119 (b)
Rex
eget pecunice.
( C 6 CI<
j potitur urbis.
* liberat ducem culpce.
These also take an Ablatv, see p.
Bex
V.
Misereor and miseresco, 7
pily. 135.
Misereor )
Miseresco |P^P^m.
Miseror, commiseror, take an Ac-
cusative
VI.
Memini, reminiscor, recorder,
I remember ; obliviscor, I forget
133 (a).
meminit v
reininiscitur I suarum cul-
recordatur parum.
oblivisuitur '
These also take an Ace. (seep.83).
VII.
Piget, it irJcs; Pudet, it shames;
Poanitet, it repents ; Ta?det, it
disgusts; Miseret, it moves pity
take a Genitive with an Ac-
cusative (see p. 82). 134.
P^et \
pudet ( scelerwm
poaaitet [ (crimes.)
I tsedet )
Eegem miseret pauperww.
These sentences literally ren-
dered, are
It irks, it shames, it repents,the king,
but in construing, the Accu-
sative should be taken first, as
if it were a Nominative.
The king repents, &c., of his crimes.
Regew -
80
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE DATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
I. I
Some Verbs are followed by
the Dative. Many of these
may be remembered if learned
in the following rhyme (See
Henry's " First Latin Book,"
(pp. 62, 63) :
A Dative put, remember pray,
After envy, spare, obey,
Persuade, believe, command; to these
Add pardon, succour, and displease;
With vacare "to have leisure,"
Andplacere "to have pleasure,"
With nubere (of the female said),
The English of it is "to wed ;''
Servire add, and add studere,
Heal, favour, hurt, resist, aud indul-
ge.
104, 105, 106.
N.B. Juvo I please, Isedo J hurt,
govern an Ace. Jubeo I order
governs an Ace. (or Dative) .
finvidet(envies)
parcit spares)
paret (obeys)
persuadet (per-
suades)
credit (believes)
j> ex / imperat (commands)
ignoscit (pardons)
succurrit (succours)
displicet (displeases)
placet (pleases)
favet (favours)
nocet (hurts)
{ resistit (opposes)
Rex vacat (has leisure for) philo-
sophic.
Regina nubit (marries) regi.
Rex servit (is the slave of) duci.
Rex studet (is eager after) literis.
Medicus medetur (heals) morbo.
Rex indulget (indulges in) dolori.
II.
Verbs compounded with tha
following Particles 106 (a.)
bene, male, satis, re,
ad, ante, con, in, inter, de,
ob, sub, super, post et praa.
Senefacit (does good to) ^
mafedicit (speaks ill
of)
sa^sfacit (satisfies)
resistit (resists)
acZhaeret (keeps close
to)
antece\l\t (surpasses)
confidit (trusts in)
infert bellum (wages
Rex { war on) duci,
interdicit (forHds) bel-
lum
f&trahit (takes away
from) pecuniam
o&stat (opposes)
subvemt (assists)
supertuit (has out-
lived)
prcestsit (is superior
to)
Rex jpostfert (sacrifices) suas opes
libertati.
Many Verbs, Jiowever, so com-
pounded are construed with the Ac-
cusative or with the Case of their
own Preposition the Preposition
being of course repeated.
THE ABLATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
81
III.
Sum, with its compounds ex-
cept possum.. 107 (b).
Absum, I am absent.
Adsum, I am present, stand by.
Desum, I am wanting.
Insum, I am in, or upon.
Intersum, I take part in.
Obsum, I am against, injure.
Prresum, I am at the head of.
Prosum, I am serviceable.
Subsum, I am unde?.
Supersum, I survive.
est causa doloris dud.
abest regince.
adest dud.
Rex * interimt prcsliis.
o&fuit dud.
preztmt exerdtui.
prodesi multis.
8uperl\\\i regince.
III.
Virtus deest (is wanting to) regi.
Magna fortitude inerat dud.
Dux subest arbori.
IV.
fat, sunt y when used for habeo,
take a Dative. 107 (c.)
Est mifii pater There is a father to
me; i.e., J have a father.
V.
Sum and other Verbs are some-
times followed by two Datives,
one being used as a Comple-
ment, the other being the
Dative of the Recipient. 108.
Mare est exitio nautis The sea is a
destruction to sailors. (See p. .)
THE ABLATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
I.
Some Verbs are followed by
the Ablative. 119 (IX. a.)
Fungor, to perform.
Fruor, to enjoy.
Utor, to use.
Vescor, to eat (feed upon.)
Potior, to get possession of.
Dignor, to deem worthy.
Hex
f ungitur m-unere ducis.
fruitur Victoria.
utitur pecunia.
vescitur carne.
potitur urbe.
dignatur se honor e.
Potior takes also a Gen. (see
P-79).
Rex
II.
Verbs of Abounding, Wanting,
Enriching, Depriving. 119 (b.)
abundat (abounds) divitiis.
eget (is in need of) pecunid.
locupletavit (enriched) dti-
cem auro.
fraudat (defrauds) me pe-
cunid.
These also take a Gen. (p.79.).
III.
Verbs wben compounded with
Prepositions, ab, de, ex. 122 (a.)
Consul magistratu abiit (retired
from office.)
Rex se dejecit (threw himself down
equo,
Dux eanit (went out of) domo.
82 NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
VERBS WHICH TAKE TWO CASES.
ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE.
T.
Verbs of Accusing, Acquitting, Condemning, Warning.
faccusat dncem ignavi<# (cowardice.)
o I conderanat ducein multorum scelenm*.
1 absolvit (acquits) dncem ignavi^.
I admonet ducewt pristine fortuu^.
II.
Figet. it irJcs. Poenittt, it repentt.
Pudet, it shames. Tsedf t, it disgusts.
Miseret, it moves pity.
{piget \
pudet
poenitet }$celerum
taadet
Regem miseret pauperww.
ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE.
Verbs of Comparing, Giving, Restoring, Promising, Owing, Pay-
irg, Telling, Threatening, Withdrawing.
Rex confer t magwa par vis.
\
rt ddit prBsm.\um \
promittit preemiwra f
debet pecuniam
solvit peouniaw \ duci
nnrrabat hcec
minatur inoi \em
detrahit pecunia?^
In all these sentences the Accusative is the Case of the nearer
Object, and the Dative the Case of the remoter Object.
VERBS WHICH TAKE EITHER OF TWO CASE3. 83
VERBS WHICH TAKE EITHER OF TWO CASES.
GENITIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.
Memiui, J remember.
Recorder, I remember.
Reminiscor, I remember
Obliviscor, I forget.
/ meminifc ) suattem culp-
reminiscitnr ( arum (or
recordatnr ( 6Uascu lp as .)
obliviscitur I
GENITIVE OR ABLATIVE.
See pp.79.81.
Verbs of Abounding or Wanting,
Enriching or Depriving, as also
potior.
Rex eget pecuni^ (or pecnnW).
Bex potitur urbz's (or urbe).
Hex liberal ducem culpce
VERBS WHICH TAKE A DOUBLE CASE.
TWO ACCUSATIVES PER-
SON AND THING.
Verbs of Asking, Teaching, En-
treating, Demanding, Admon-
ishing, Concealing.
/ rogavit hoc ducem.
docuit filittm literas.
Rex
I orat te "hoc,
I poscit ducem pace?7t.
I monuit ducem. ea.
V celavit ea ducem.
TWO ACCUSATIVES-
OBJECT AND COMPLEMENT,
Verbs of making,
Thinking, &c.
Calling,
1 fecit militem dncem.
vocavit urbem Eomam
putat ducem siultum
TWO DATIVES.
Sum with other words.
Filius est dedecori raatri The son is a disgrace to his mother.
Vertis id vitio mihi You impute it as a fault to me.
84 NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
ADJECTIVES AND THEIR CASES.
It should be noted hero, that although logically the construction or Cases
with Verbs and Adjectives ought to be considered under one head, it has been
found convenient in this very elementary work to treat the Verbs and
Adjectives apart. ,
Adjectives, like Verbs, take certain Cases after them. We
will give them in the following order.
1 . Those which take the Genitive.
2. Those which take the Dative.
3. Those whiqji take the Ablative.
4. Those which take the Genitive or Ablative.
THE GENITIVE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE.
I
The Genitive of the Thing Measured follows words denoting
quantity, such as satis, parwn, &c., and Neuter Adjectives, such
as aliquid, muJtum, &c. 131.
Rex habet satis sapientia (sufficient wisdom*)
Rex habet multum pecunics (much money.")
II.
Adjectives which signify
skill, knowledge, desire, fear,
care, memory, power, innocence,
and their contraries 132 (I.), 133 (IT.)
take a Genitive after them
/peritus belli.
negligens (regardless of) officii.
cupidus laudis.
potens (master of) sui
. , .
conscius recti.
inemor leneficii.
timidus mortis.
^insons mendacii (falsehood)
x est <
ADJECTIVES AND THEIR CASES.
85
THE DATIVE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE.
Adjectives which signify
advantage,
disadvantage,
likeness,
unlikeness,
pleasure,
displeasure,
submission,
nearness, &c., <&e.
take a Dative after them. 105, 106.
Ilex est
utilis patriiz, iuutilis exercitui.
similis deo, dissimilis patri.
gratus omnibus.
supplex regince.
fiuitimus (near akin to) pootos
THE ABLATIVE AFTEK THE ADJECTIVE.
L
The following Adjectives
an Ablative 119 (IX. a)
dignus, worthy ;
indignus, unworthy ;
coutentus, contented ;
fretus, relying ;
praeditus, endued.
J dignus culpd.
ex est / i n dig nus laude.
\conteni\isparvo,
virtute.
take
Rex fretus divitiis abiit
II.
As also the Substantives
opus and usus 119 (IX. a).
Opus est mihi pecunit.
Uaiis est miLi pecunid.
III.
Adjectives which take a Geni
live or Ablative. 119 (IX. b.)
abounding,
wanting,
enriching,
depriving.
Ten a est dives eqi(orum (or equis).
Eex est expers metus (or metu).
86
NEW EASY LATIN PROIElt.
DIFFERENT USES OF CASES.
We have given the Cases as they come after Verb or Adjective. We
proceed now to consider some of the different uses of the different
Cases, and to give examples.
NOMINATIVE.
I.
The Nominative as Subject. 93.
Hex pugnat.
II.
Nominative put in Apposition.
90.
Rex,filius ducis, pugnat.
III.
Nominative used in exclamations
with or without an Interjection.
138.
In/and iin ! Unutterable !
Ecce nova turba ! Lo I a new dis-
turbance 1
IV.
Nominative, with quam, after
Comparative. 124, xiv. (i.)
Ferrum est durius quam cera.
Nominative after certain Verbs
(see p. 78).
VOCATIVE.
The Vocative is said to stand
out of the sentence, as it
never depends on any word.
137.
Eex, pugnas.
ACCUSATIVE.
I.
Accusative as Subject of the
Infinitive. 93 (2).
Scio regem pugnare,
N.B. This will be fully explained
in another place (see p. 100).
II.
Accusative put in Apposition.
90.
Rex laudat ducem,fortem virum.
III.
Accusative of .Respect. 100.
Hex tremit artus.
Hex est nudus lacertos,
IV.
Accusatives used in Exclama-
tions with or \vithout an Inter-
jection. 138.
Me miserum, ivretched me 1
En quatuor aras ! Lo,four altars I
V.
Accusative, Duration of Time
102 (1).
Hex regnavit duos annos.
DIFFERENT USES OF CASES.
87
VI.
Accusative, Measure of Space.
102 (2).
Muri erant duos pedes alti.
Bee Ablative of Measure, p.
VII.
Accusative, after certain Pre-
positions (see list, p.58).
Ecx dixit contra spem.
I.
Genitive of the Author and
Possessor. 127.
Bex est filius duds.
n.
Genitive put in Apposition.
90.
Rex est filius ducis, fortis viri.
HI.
Genitive of Quality
Epithet. 128 (II.)
VIII.
Accusative oi Place Whither*
101.
Eex ivit Eomam.
IX.
Accusative, with quam, after
Comparative. 124 (xiv. 2)
Puto mortem leviorem quam dede-
cus.
Accusative after Transitive
Verbs, as already mentioned.
GENITIVE.
HI.
Ablative may be also used
(see p. 88 .)
IV.
Elliptic Genitives. (128) (a.)
Parvi, of little value.
Minoris, of less value.
Minimi, of very little value.
Magni, of great value.
Pluris, of more value.
Plurimi, of high value.
Tanti, of so great value or price.
Quanti, of what price.
Maxiini. of very great price.
(with ^ ex em ^ ^ un ^ um magni, at a great
price.
Genitive after certain Verbs
(see p.79.)and Adjectives.
Rex est vir vnagnce fortitudinis.
DATIVE.
I.
Dative in Apposition. 90.
Eex dat librum duci, forti viro
II.
With the exclamations, hei, alas! vse, woe ! 139.
He mihi ! Vaa regi I
III.
Dative after certain Verbs (see p.so). 104, 105, 106.
88
NEW EAST LAT1X PRIMER.
I.
Ablative in Apposition. 90.
Rex utitur ense, telo acuto.
II.
Ablative after ibe Comparative
degree. 124 (XIV.)
Rex est fortior duce.
in.
Ablative after certain Prepo-
sitions (see list). 122 (XII.)
Dux dicebat cor am rege.
After some when compounded.
Rex afciit magistrate.,
IV.
Ablative of tbe Agent takes
tbe Preposition, a, ab. 122
CXIT. 6).
Rex culpatur a regind.
V.
Ablative of Cause (a.)
Rex est bonus amore virtutis.
VI.
Ablative of the Instrument.
M
Rex dcfendit se manibus
ABLATIVE.
VII.
Ablative of Manner (c )
Rex
Excepting in a few phiases Abla-
tive of Manuer without Epithet re-
quires cum.
VIII.
1 Ablative of Condition, (d.)
Rex est fortis mea sententia.
Ablative of Quality with Epi-
thet, (e.)
Rex est benigno vultx.
X.
Ablative of Respect. ( /. )
Rex augitur (is distressed) animo.
XL
j Ablative of Price, (g.)
Bex emit funduui magna pecunia.
XII.
Ablative of Measure, (/t.)
Murus erat latua pede (a foot
broad.)
XIII.
Ablative of Matter. (/.)
Cibus ducis constat carne, &c.
ON CASES INDEPENDENT OF VERB OR ADJECTIVE.
89
XIV.
Ablative of Time IP/**;*? 120(X.)
Rex pugnavit hieme.
Rex veuiet biduo (in two days').
Romulus vixit paucis annis ante
Numam, multis annis post Ilonie-
mm.
XV.
Ablative of Place Where? 121
(XI A)
See Locative Case, below.
Ri-x vixit Neapoli et postea Thebis.
Ternpla patent (are open') tota urbe.
XVI.
Ablative of a Town when the
question is Whence ? 121 (XI. 0.)
Rex fugit Boma.
So also with cZorao and rure.
XVII.
The Ablative of Place is put
without a Preposition, when
the question is 13 y ichut road /
121 (XI. A.)
Rex*ibat. pvsecipiti via.
XVIII.
Ablative Absolute. (125)
Urbe condita, Romulus factus est
rex.
This Ablative Absolute, how-
ever, we must explain at greater
length.
LOCATIVE CASE.
I.
See Latin Primer. 121 (B, a.)
Place Where" is put in a Case resembling the Genitive Singular if tho
word be of the First or Second Declension, Singular Number; if not, in a
Case resembling the Ablative.
II.
Like to the above are used. 121 (B, 6).
humi, on the ground.
Coaii, at home.
belli | at the
militias / wars
run, in the country.
Hex est foitis domi et
90
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.*
The Latin Piimer Rule is as
follo\YS :
A Substantive combines with a Parti-
ciple in the Ablative which is called
Absolute.
Now this requires some ex-
planation which a teacher will
always supply when possible
viva voce to his pupil or class.
But some people take up the
study of Latin without any
help but that derived from
Books. Hence many explana-
tions in theAuthor's Books will,
of course, be passed over by
those who, in a much better
way, will make the explanation
by word of mouth.
In turning Latin into English, the
rule for construing is this :
Take the Ablative Case of the Sub-
stantive as if it were a Nominative
by which I mean, take it without
putting any sign before it and then
take the Participle either directly, or
as 30071 after as you can.
It must be noted, however,
that it is not always a Sulstan-
tive that is used ; but sometimes
it may be an Adjective (used
as a Substantive), and some-
times the Relative Pronoun.
EXAMPLE 1. "In eodern quondam
prato pascebantur anseres et grues.
Adveniente domino prati, grues,'
&c., &c.
The Latin words in italics form
an Ablative Absolute. Follow
the Rule given. Take the Abla-
tive Case of the Substantive,
domino, but put no sign to it
saying, Domino, " the master;"
prati, t; of the field ; " and then
the Participle (which you will
find in the Ablative Case, ad
vi'niente, " coming up." " The
master of the field coming up,
the cranes (easily flaw away)."
EXAMPLE 2. " Mures aliquando
habuerunt consilium quomodo a fele
caverent. Multis aliis propositis,
omnibus placuit," &c.
Multis aids propositis is an
Ablative Absolute in the Plural
Number. There isno Substantive
to take, but there are two Adjec-
tives. So we take mullis a^'/s,put-
ting no sign before it, and say,
Multis aliis, "many other things;"
propositisjz&'vmg been proposed
2ilacuit, "it pleased," &c.,&c.,&c.
* N.B. Absolute, i.e- released (absolutus) so to speak from government.
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
91
EXAMPLE 3. " Agricola senex quum
mortem sibi propinquare sentiret,
filios convocavit, quos, ut fieri solet,
iuterdum discordare noverat, et fas-
cem virgultorum afferri jussit. Quibus
allatis, filios hortabatur, &c. &c.
Quibus allatis is an Ablative
Absolute, the Relative Pronoun
being used. We take quibus
(agreeing with virgultis, under-
stood), putting no sign before
it, and say, Qidbus, " which ; "
allatis," having been brought ;"
hortabatur, u he exhorted," &c.
Sometimes instead of a Parti-
ciple another Substantive (or
an Adjective) is used.
Ccesare duce vincemus.
Casar, being our leader, we shall
conquer.
There will be still more diffi-
culty in knowing when to use
an Ablative Absolute in turning
English into Latin.
The King, when he has conquered
his enemies, will return home.
Here it is said that the King
will do a certain thing after
another thing has been done
that he will return home when
he has conquered his enemies ;
when he has conquered his enemits
may therefore be put into an
Ablative Absolute, as
Hex, hostibus victis, red bit domum,
If you are my leader, I shall conquer.
If you are my leader may be an
Ablative Absolute.
Te duce, vincam.
Care must be taken not to put
in the Ablative Case a Substan-
tive having a participle agree-
ing with it when it forms the
subject of the Verb.
Caesar, being made consul, departed
We must not put the words
CcBsar being made Consul as an
Ablative Absolute ; if we did,
we should leave " departed"
without any Nominative Case.
Csesar factus consul, (not Casara
facto consule) abiit.
If, however, we say ;
Ccesar, his enemies being conquered,
departed.
we can put his enemies being
conquered into an Ablative Ab-
solute (victis hostibus), as it
does not form the Nomina-
tive Case or Subject to the
Verb.
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
QUAM AFTER THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE.
There are two ways of expressing the word " than " in
Latin aft.T a comparative degree (124 xiv.).
I. By the word quam, which is followed by any case, the
things compared being in the same case.
Iron is harder than wax.
Ferrum est durius quam cera.
They say that iron is harder than wax.
Dicunt ferrum esse duriorem quam ceram.
Sooner forget injuries than kindnesses.
Citius obliviscere injuriarum quam leneficiorum.
II. By the Ablative case, quam being left out.
Iron is harder than wax.
Ferrum est durius cera (Abl.).
I think that death is lighter than disgrace.
Puto mortem esse leviorem dedecore.
But in comparison with cases other than the Nominative or
Accusative quam must be used, as also where its omission
would cause any ambiguity.
I his is more useful to me than to you.
Hoc est utilius mihi quam tibi.
I have lost more money than you (have).
Ego amisi plus pecuniae quam tu.
He is richer in lands than in servants.
Est ditior agris quam ministris.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 93
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
One very important thing for a boy to remember is the proper
Sequence of Tenses.
The Present, Future, and Perfect (with " have"), are followed
by Present or Perfect Subjunctive, or Future Participle in rus with
bim.
The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Perfect are followed by Imper-
fect or Pluperfect Subjunctive, or Futwe Participle in rus with
Essem.
Queero, 1 ask. \ Quid aga?, what you are doing.
Quseram, 1 will ash. > Quid egeris, what you did or have done.
Quaesivi, 1 have asked. } Quid acturus sis, what you are going to do.
Quserebam, I was asking. \ Quid ageres, what you were doing.
Qusesivi, 1 asked. ( Quid egisses, what you had done.
, 1 had asked. } Quid acturus esses ) what you were about to do.
Let these points also bo noted.
Dicit se amare, he says that he is loving.
Dixit se amare, he said that he was loving. .
Dicit se amavisse, he says that he has loved, or loved.
Dixit se amavisse, he said that he had loved.
Polliretur se amahmrm e?se, he promises that he will love.
Pollicitus est se amaturum etse, he promised that he wculd love-
94
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
1.
The Verb Infinite consists of
Verb -Nouns.
(1.) The Infinitive.
(2.) The Gerunds
(3.) The Supines
which supply
cases to Iii-
fiuiiive.
(4.) Participles.
See Latin Primer, 45 (II.)
II.
The Infinitive with the Ge-
runds, Participles, and Supine
in itm, governs the same cases
as the Verb Finite. 142 (HI.)
Dux vult obedire rtiagistro.
Dux cupidus est obediendi magistro,
III.
The Infinitive is often used
as a Substantive for the Nomi-
native or Accusative Case.
140 (I.)
Discere (Norn ) est difficile.
Puer dic't (calls i 1 ) miserum mori
(Ace.)
IV
It is used Obliquely (or in
what is known as Enuntiatio
Obliqua) with Accusative oi
Subject. 140 (3); 93 (2).
Aiunt terram esse rotundara.
V.
It is used in narration for a
Finite Verb. 140 (2).
Fors omnia regere.
Chance governed all things.
VI.
It is used to carry on the
construction of a Verb or Ad-
jective. 140 (4).
Ptiir voluit discere multa
Puer paratus (ready) discere multa
GEKUNDS AND SUPINES.
GERUNDS.
I.
There are three Gerunds end-
ing in dum, di, do, reckoned as
part of the Verb Infinite, and,
as mentioned above, forming
as it were cases when the In-
finitive is declined as a Verbal
Substantive.
II.
These Gerunds are called
1. Accusative iu dum, Amandwm,
loving.
2. Genitive in di, AmantK, of loving.
3. Dative or Ablative in do, Amando,
to or for or by loving.
III.
The Accusative Gerund is
joined to Prepositions. 141 (1.)
Puer natus est ad agendum.
IV.
The GmltivB Gerund is joined
to Substantives and Adjectives.
141 (2).
Rex didicit artem scribendi.
Rex est cupidus bene scribendi.
V.
The Dative Gerund is joined to
Nouns and Verbs 141 (3.)
Puer dat ope ram discendo.
The AbJativ3 Gerund is of
cause or manner, or is used
with a Preposition. 141 (4.)
Puer discit docendo.
Puer vincit pugnando.
Reges rixantur (quarrel) de spoli-
ando.
SUPINES.
I.
There are two Supines called
1. Supine in urn, Amatww, to love.
3. Supine in u, Amatw, to be loved.
II.
The Supine in um is an
Accusative after Verbs of
motion ; it is thus equivalent
to " ut" with the Subjunctive.
141 (5.)
Puer it (goes) dormitum,
This Supine, used with m,
which is the Present Infini-
II.
tive Passive of eo, to yo, forms
the Infinitive of the Future
Passive. 141 (5 a.)
Dux sperat proelia non pugnatum iri
III.
The Supine in u follows the in-
declinable Substantives/as,?7<?/fls
opus & certain Adjectives, & is
an AbL of Respect. 141 (6.)
Difficile est dictu.
It is difficult to say, or to be said, or
in saying.
96
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PARTICIPLES.
I.
There are Four Participles.
1. Present in ans or ens, as
Am ans, monens.
2. Participle in dus (the Ge-
rundive), as
Amano'ws.
3. Perfect in us, as
Amattts.
4. Future in rus, as
Amaturws.
They are arranged in this
order for the sake of their
being more easily formed, as
follows :
1. The Present Participle is formed
from the present tense by chang-
ing o into ans or ens, as amo,
amans ; rego, regens.
N.B. In the Second Congngation it will
be by changing eo into ens, as moneo,
monen*.
2. The Participle in dus (Gerun-
dive) is formed from the present
Participle by throwing away s
and adding dus, as amans, aman-
dus ; regens, regencies.
2. The Perfect Participle is formed
from the Supine in um by
changing um into us, as araa-
tum, amatws ; rectum, rectws.
4. The Future Participle is formed
from the Supine in u by add-
ing rus, as amatw, amaturws;
rectw, recturws.
N.B. It will lie seen that "before the
Participles can lie formed in this
ivay the Supines must be known.
II.
These Participles are also
classed in another way :
Two Active
1 . Present in ans or ens.
2. Future in rus.
Two Passive.
1. Perfect in us.
2. Participle in dus.
THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
I. I
The Present Participle is used |
in Latin Prose to express con- |
tinuous action, as
The boy went, carrying his books
with him.
Puer ibat gerens suos libros secum.
That is, he was carrying his
books all the time he was goiug.
II.
It must not be used to express
a single instantaneous action,
as
Drawing his sword ( really, ''hav-
ing drawn his sword"), the Icing
attacked the enemy.
Euse stricto (or) quum ensem
btrinxisset (not ensem stiingens)
rex impetum fecit in hostes.
PARTICIPLES.
97
III.
The pupil will hardly require
to be reminded that though
ing is the ending of the Pre-
sent Participle, yet that a word
may end in "ing" and yet not
be translated by a Present Par-
ticiple in Latin, as
1. Learning is useful. Learning
here will be translated by the In-
finitive Mood, discere.
2. The love of hunting. Of hunting
will be the Genitite Gerund, Ven-
andi; or the Substantive Vena-
tionis.
3. We learn by teaching. By teach-
ing will, of course be the Ablative
Gerund.
PARTICIPLE IN BUS.
This has been fully explained
as The Gerundive, pp. 98, 99.
THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE.
I.
The Perfect Participle Passive is
the one most frequently found
in Latin, as Amatus loved, having
been loved. It is also the Par-
ticiple generally used in the
Ablative Absolute.
CcBsar having been made consul de-
parted.
Csesar factus consul abiit.
Ceesar, Brutus having been made
consul, departed.
CaBsar, Bruto facto consule, abiit.
II.
We must remember that Intrasitive
Verbs have no Per/. Part. Pass.,
such as "ventus" from "venio,"
and that the Perf. Part, of a Depo-
ment Verb, means having (and not
having been), as usus, having used
from utor.
FUTURE PARTICIPLE.
I.
II.
The Future Part : always ends
in urus and the English is
"about to," "going to," "in-
tending to, "and also simply ' ' to"
Amaturue, " about to love" " going
to love," " intending to love," or
simply, " to love," with, of course,
a future meaning.
II.
This Future Part : is used
with the Infinitive of the Verb
sum to form the Future Infini-
tive Active.
The boy said that he would come.
Puer dixit se venturum esse.
III.
This Future Part : is sometimes
used to express a purpose instead
of ut with the Subjunctive.
The boy goes away to consult his
father.
Puer abit consulturus patrem.
G
98
KEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
THE GERUNDIVE.
The Gerundive is another name,
and no doubt a more correct
one, for the old-fashioned Par-
ticiple in dus. It is of like
form with the Gerund, hence
the name Gerundive. It is
sometimes used in place of the
Gerund
Puer est studioeus audiendi patrem.
The boy is very desirous of hearing
his father.
Here we have the Genitive
Gerund with the Accusative
Case after it, but instead of
this the Gerundive may be used.
We put our Substantive in the
case we want it to be (here
his father will be the Genitive)
and make our Gerundive agree
with it. 143.
Puer est studiosus patris audiendi.
Bex interfeclus est iu liberandd
urbe.
This is called the Gerundive
Attraction, and should only be
used when the Verb governs
the Accusative.
H.
The English of the Gerundive
with sum is " is to be," " is
meet to be," " must be."
Amandnsest, He is to be loved, must
be loved, is meet to be loved,
III.
When the word must has to be
turned into Latin we must
generally use the Gerundive in
agreement with the Substan-
tive, provided the Verb governs
an Accusative. 144 (IV. 2.)
The gate must be shut.
Porta claudenda est.
The food must be taken.
Gibus sunieudus est.
The state must be ruled.
itespublica regenda est
IV.
When the Gerundive of neuter
or intransitive Verbs, as "live,"
" die," has to be used, it must
be used Impersonally in the
neuter Gender with "est," and
what might be supposed to be
the Nominative Case is to be
turned into the Dative. 144
(IV, L a.)
"We must live well.
Beue vivendum est nobis.
1 must live well.
Beae vivendum c-st mihi.
He must live well.
Beue vivenduiu est illi.
The boy must live well
Puero bene vivendum est
THE GERUNDIVE.
99
V.
When the English Nominative
means ";<?," or "people in gene-
ral" it is generally left out
We must live well.
Beae vivendum efat (nobis).
We must die.
Moriendum est (nobis).
VI.
If this .Gerundive comes from
a Verb which governs the Da-
tive Case (as credo), the sen-
tence is a little more puzzling,
as there will then be two Da-
tives in the sentence the
Dative after the Gerundive
(Agent) and the Dative of
the Object after the Verb.
144 (IV. 1, &).
We must believe good people.
i.e.,
Good people must be believed by us.
Credendum est nobis bonis homini-
bu3.
But in instances of this kind,
where the sense would be
doubtful, the agent is some-
times expressed by a or ab
with the Ablative, as
A nobis credendum est bonis homi-
nibus.
Sometimes, however, the agent
may be left out (see v,) where
its omission can cause no am-
biguity, and the sentence stand,
Credcudum est bonis hominilius.
VII.
Let the pupil study well these
sentences, of which we give
both the Latin and the English.
We must labour.
Laborandum est (aobis).
The wicked must die.
Improbis monendum est.
We must believe.
Credendum est (nobis).
We must believe the wise.
Credendum est sapientibus.
(Dat. of Object).
We must read the book.
Liber legendus est nobis,
We must fear the wicked
Improbi nobis tiinendi sunt.
The wicked must fear.
Improbis metueudum est.
We must pardon the boys.
Ignosceiiduin est pueris
(Dat. of Object.)
VIII.
" Must" and " ought," are to
be expressed in Latin, however,
sometimes by the Impersonal
Verb oportet
We ougbt to we must "believe you
Oportet DOS credere vobis.
Or by necesse est, it is necessary,
We must obey our parents.
Necesse est nobis parere parentibus.
IX.
There are yet, however, other
senses in which must is used,
and the Latin will therefore be
altogether different
You must hear me, i.e., nothing
shall prevent your hearing me.
Nihil obstabit quominus audias mp.
100
NEW EASY LATIN PKIMER.
ACCUSATIVE CASE AND INFTNITIVE MOOD.
This form of expression, like
that of the Ablative Absolute,
is also one which beginners
are very slow to learn, but
a few words of explanation
and example should make it
plain.
This Accusative and Infinitive
is called Enuntiatio ( bliqua
or Oblique (Indirect) Enuncia-
tion, or statement.
The Latin Primer Rule is
"The Subject of an Infinitive is
put in the Accusative."
It having been just previously
stated that
* The Subject of a Finite Verb is a
Nominative."
And the two examples it gives
are
Anni fugiunt. Tears flee.
Constat annos fugere. It is evident
that years flee,
(Latin Primer, 93. 1, 2.)
In the first example we have
A Finite Verb (fugiunt) with
the Nominative (mini) ; and
in the second example we
have the Infinitive Verb (Verb
in the Infinitive Mood) with
the Accusative annos.
As with the Ablative Absolute
it will be well to take this as
found in Latin, that the Pupil
may first learn how to con-
strue it when he sees it in a
Latin Sentence. This will
enable him also to know how
to turn the Oblique Enuncia-
tion into Latin, though here
again the more difficult thing
will be to know when to use
the Accusative and Infinitive,
and when to use ut with the
Subjunctive Mood.
Let us look carefully at the
following sentence, and see
how we ought to construe it.
Vidernus aves auctumno in alias
terras migrare.
We see that birds migrate into other
lands in autumn.
Here we have an Accusative
Case (fives), and an Infinitive
Mood (migrare). We take vide*
mus, according to the old, but
never-to-be-forgotten, rule
" Take the Nominative Case,
first, and, if there is not one,
take the Verb, and put in a
Nominative ;" then we will
ACCUSATIVE CASE AND INFINITIVE MOOD.
101
take aves, as the Accusative
Case, and Subject of the In-
finitive Mood migrare ; before
the Accusative. Case, we will
put in the most important
word "THAT"; and, as migrare
is the Present Infinitive, we
will construe it as if it were
the Third Person Plural of the
Present Indicative videmus,
we see aves that birds migrare
migrate.
In turning such a Sentence
into Latin We see that
birds migrate, we leave out
the word "that" turn what
might be the Nominative into
the Accusative, and put the
Verb in the Infinitive Mood ;
instead of, as learners might
think they were to do, using
" ut " with the Subjunctive.
But here sometimes is the
difficulty the knowing when
to use the Accusative and In-
finitive, and when to use " ut "
with the Subjunctive. The ex-
planation however that seems
most satisfactory is
When before the word " that "
in English you can insert the
words "as a matter of fact,"
then in Latin the Accusative
with Infinitive is used, as-^
1. They say (as a matter of fact that
the earth is round.
Aiunt TEKRAM BSSE rotundam,
3. It is certain (as a matter of fact)
that the earth moves round the
sun.
Constat TEEKAM MOVERI circum
solem.
3. We believe (as a matter of fact)
that God is the Creator of all
things.
Credimus DEUM ESSB Creatoron
omnium rerum.
But we enter more particu-
larly into this in the follow-
ing pages, which we head
with the word ** THAT."
Reverting, however, for a
moment to the mode of con-
struing such sentences as we
have given, we see that in all
these we have first to put in
the word "that" take the
Accusative Case as if it were
a Nominative, then take the
Infinitive Mood and construe
it, as if it were the Indicative
Mood. And as in the first
and third sentences the Ac-
cusative comes before esse (as
the Subject), we take care to
have the Accusative after esse
(as the Complement).
102
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
"THAT" AND " UT."
There are two common ways
of expressing " THAT " in
Latin
1. Accusative and Infinitive.
We hear that the boy is sick.
Audinius puerum esse segium.
2. "Ut" with the Subj.
The boy is so idle that he has learned
nothing.
Puer est tarn ignavus wYdidiceritnihil.
But when to express *' that "
by the Accusative and Infini-
tive, and when by " ut" with
the Subjunctive, is no doubt
very puzzling. We give here
some very simple rules and
explanations.
I.
Use the Ace. and Infin. after
Verbs of saying, thinking,
knowing, hearing, perceiving,
&c , and with such words as
constat, manifestum est, Jama
fS/, &C., &C.
The boy says \ that he has learned
The bey thinks many things well.
II is certain] that the boy has learned
It is evident > many things well.
II.
Fuer dicit
Se didicisse multa beue.
Filer putat
Uoost.it puerum didicisse multa bene.
" Ut" with the Subjunctive
however, is used generally
after
Accidit, it "happens.
Reliquurn est, it remains.
Sequitur, it follows.
And many other like words.
Accidit ut puer puniatur.
Beliquura e^t ut puer eat domum.
Sequitur ut puev sit domi.
III.
When "to," the ordinary sign
of the Infinitive, can be turned
into "that," "in order that,"
it expresses a purpose and must
be rendered by " ut " with the
Subjunctive, as
The boy was sent to school to learn
(i.e., that, in order that, he might
learn, i.e., for the purpose of learn-
ing)-
Fuer missus est ad ludum utdisceret.
IV.
After "so" and " such," " r
with the Subjunctive is used to
express a consequence.
The boy is so idle that he has learned
nothing.
Fuer est tarn ignavus ut didiceri nibil
THAT AND " UT.
103
V.
The word " that " is also used
after Verbs of doubting, if pre-
ceded by a negative or a ques-
tion, &c., inwbich case it must
be translated by "quin," and
" quin" takes the Subjunctive ;
There is no doubt f *** the b ^ lovcs
Who doubts fas mother very
* much.
Non est dulium i
QuisduUtat \
v em valdo.
VI.
When " that not " can be
turned into " lest,' it is called
a negative PURPOSE, and must
be translated by "ne."
The boy is sent to school that he may
not be ignorant of letters.
Puer mittitur ad ludura ne (that not,
lesf) sit ignarus literarum.
But when "that not" is used
ko express a negative CONSE-
QUENCE, "ut non"mustbe used.
He was so idle as not to learn many
things.
Erat tainignavus utnondisceretmults.
VII.
When there is a comparative
in the dependent clause, the
word " that " must be trans-
lated by "quo," and requires
the Subjunctive, as
The boy is punished that he may be
the more industrious.
Puer punitur quo sit diligentior.
VIII.
With words of fearing, "ne"and
"ut" seem to exchange places ;
" that" must be translated by
" ne " "that not" by "ut," as
I fear that the boy will not come.
Vereor ut puer veniat.
J fear that the boy will come, i.e , J
am afraid lest he come.
Vereor ne puer veniat.
IX.
After words expressing hind-
rance use quominus with the
Subjunctive,
What prevents the boy from going
home ?
Quid obstat quominus puer eat
domum ?
X.
It has been said that when
"that" introduces a purpose,
it must be translated by " ut "
with the Subjunctive ; but some-
times the idea of purpose is not
clearly brought out in the Eng-
lish sentence, as, e.g., after the
Verbs-
Advise, ask, command (not jubeo),
Exhort, beg, strive (not couor),
where, nevertheless, a purpose
is implied, and therefore " ut "
with the Subjunctive is used,
as
Moneo te ut bene vivas.
I advise you to live well.
Impero tibi ut bene vivas.
I command you to live well.
104 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
OBLIQUE STATEMENT.
An Oblique Statement is ordinarily formed by the Infinitive
Clause (Accusative with Infinitive) and depends on an Impersonal
Verb, or a Verb of declaring, thinking, perceiving, &c.
In Oblique Statement all the principal Verbs will stand in the
Infinitive Mood, whereas all the Subordinate Verbs, i.e., the
Verbs in the Subordinate Clauses (provided they express the
words and opinions of the original speaker) will be in the
Subjunctive.
Caesar " Plura stint" inquit "qu volo dicere tibi." (Direct.)
Ccesar said, l ' There are more things which I wish to mention to you?
Here Sunt is the principal Verb and Volo the Subordinate Verb ;
therefore in Oratio Obliqua the sentence will run thus
Ceesar dixit plura esse qnee vellet dicere ei. (Oblique.)
Ccesar said, that there were more things which he wished to mention to
him.
QUI.
Qui requires the Subjunctive when there is implied
(1.) In order that, Litteras scrips! quibus ( = tu iis) puerum.
monerem.
(2.) Since, Pudet me tui qui ( = quum tu) tarn ignavus sis.
(3.) Such that, Sunt qui (= ejnsmodi ut) discant multa.
(4.) Although, Ego, qui (= quamvis ego) senex sim, disco multa.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 105
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Many pages might here be written on the Subjunctive
Mood, but we will be content with giving the principal con-
junctions which are followed by the Subjunctive Mood.
I.
CONSECUTIVE ut, so that ; quin, but that.
The boy is so foolish that he knows nothing.
Puer est ita stultus ut nihil sciat.
There is no doubt but that these things are true.
Non est dubium quin ( = ut non) base vera sint.
Who is there who does not weep ?
Quis est quin ( =
II.
FINAL ut, in order that. Quo, in order that.
ne, lest, that not. Quominus, bat that.
I will strive to conquer, i.e. in order that I may conquer.
Enitar ut vincam.
I will strive that you may not conquer (i.e. lest you should).
Enitar ne vlncas.
I will strive in order that I may conquer the more easily.
Enitar quo facilius vincam.
What hinders me from conquering (i.e. but that I may conquer) ?
Quid obstat quominus ( = ut eo minus) vincam f
III.
CAUSAL quum, since.
Since these things are so, I will go.
Quse quum ita sint, ibo.
IV.
CONDITIONAL Dum, modo, dummodo, provided that.
The general ivill conquer provided that he fears nothing.
Dux vincet dum nihil metuat.
V.
CONCESSIVE Licet, quamvis, ut, although.
Although those things are true, I mill not go.
Ut ea vera sint non ibo.
VI.
COMPARATIVE Tanquam, ceu, velut, quasi, as if.
You talk as if I were foolish.
Loqueris tanquam stultus sim.
106
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
I.
Impersonal Verbs are those
which have no Personal Pro-
noun as Subject, and are used
only in the Third Person Sin-
gular (Ind. and Conj.) and in
the Infinitive Mood.
It hails, grandinat.
It vexes me, me piget.
For the Conjugation of Im-
personal Verbs see pp. 61, 62,
of the Latin Primer .
II.
The greater number of the Im-
personal Verbs are of the second
conjugation. We give those
that are most commonly used.
/. Conjugation.
Delectat, it delights.
Juvat, it delights.
Constat, it is evident,
Tonat, it thunders.
Fulgurat, it lightens.
Grandinat, it hails.
II. Conjugation.
Oportet, it behoves.
Decet, it becomes.
Dedecet, it is unseemly.
Figet, it irks.
Pudet, it shames.
Pcenitet, it repents.
Taedet, it disgusts.
Miseret, it moves pity.
Libet, it pleases.
Licet, it is lawful.
Liquet, it is clear.
Attinet, it relates.
Pertinet,, it belongs.
III. Conjugation.
Accidit, it happens.
Contingit, it befalls
Ningit, it snows.
Plait, it rains.
Lucescit, it dawns.
Vesperascit, it grows lats.
IV. Conjugation.
Convenit, it suits.
Evenit, it turns out.
Expedit, it is expedient.
Irregular.
Interest, it imports.
Befert, it concerns.
III.
Intransitive Verbs also, and
Verbs which take a Dative Case
after them if used in the Pas-
siveVoice, are used impersonally
There is playing by me, or I play.
Luditur a me.
I am believed. Creditur mihi.
IV.
The Neuter of the Gerundive is
often used impersonally.
I must play. There must be playing
by me. Ludendum est mihi.
V.
In using Impersonal Verbs the
different persons, 7, thoit, lie,
&c., are expressed by the
different cases the Verbs
take after them.
The following are used with
the Accusative Case
Decet. Juvat. Piget.
Dedecet. Oportet. Pcenitet.
Delectat. Miseret. Pudet.
Teedet.
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1Q7
Oportet me ire, it behoves me to go, or I ought to go.
Oportetteire you you
Oportet eum ire him he
&c. &c. &o &G.
VI.
The following are used with the Dative Case
Libet. Licet. Accidit. Contingit. Evenit. Convenit. Expedit.
as
Licet mi hi ire. it is allowed me to go, or I may go.
Licet tibi ire you you
Licet ei ire him ,, he
&c. &c. &c. <&o.
YIT.
Intransitive Verbs when used impersonally in the Passive
Voice sometimes have the Ablative and Preposition, to express
the person, as
Luditur a me, there is playing "by me, or I flay.
Luditur a te ,, you you play.
Luditur ab eo ,, him he plays.
&e. &c. &c. &c.
But this Ablative is often left out.
VIII.
Interest, refert, are used with the Genitive as also with the Pos-
sessive Cases, mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra. 129 (III. ).
Regis interest facere recte.
Regis refert facere recte,
It imports (it concerns) the king to act rightly.
See also p. II.
Et tua et mea interest te valere,
It is both to your interest and mine that you should be well.
IX.
The Impersonals
Pulgurat, it lightens. Pluit, it rains. Luscescit, it dawns.
Tonat, it thunders. Grandinat, it hails. Vesperascit, it gets late
Ningit, it snows
are of course not used with any Personal or other Object.
108 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
MODE OF ASKING QUESTIONS.
The Interrogative Pronoun "quis " asks a question, as
Quis homo est ? Who is the man ?
Qua sunt illae puellse ? Who are those girls ?
Quid agis ? What are you doing ?
Quid est nomen tibi? What is your name ?
Cujus est hie liber? Whose is this book ?
Such words also, as
Quando, when ? Quo, whither ?
Ubi, When ? Quorsum, whitherward f
Quamdiu, how long ? Unde, whence ?
Quoties, how often ? Qua, which way ?
Ubi, where ? Quatenus, how far *
Quousque, hou far ?
are all of them Interrogates, but they can ask only particu-
lar questions, as
Quo curds ? Whither do you run ?
Quando redibis ? When will you return ?
Quoties dixisti hoc ? How often have you said this ?
&e., &.c., &c.
1.
But in asking questions in Latin the word ne is frequently
used, in much the same way that we use the note of Interro-
gation in (?) English ; no English is to be given to it, as
Videsne, puer?
Do you see, boy ?
MODE OF ASKING QUESTIONS,
109
II.
If there is a nan in the sen-
tence ne will come at the end
of non, and will thus make
non>^, as
Nonne est puer diligens ?
Is not the boy industrious ?
From the very wording of the
sentence, it will be seen that
the answer "yes" is expected
nonne therefore is said to be
a sign of a question when the
answer "yes" is expected.
III.
Num is put when the answer
"no" is expected, and, like nc,
must not be translated, as
Num est puer diligens ?
Is the boy industrious ?
Here, however, the answer
"no" being expected, the
question may be turned so as
to show this and the words
rendered not simply
Is the boy industrious f
to which "yes" or u no" is
applicable, but
The boy is not industrious, is he ?
to which it is clearly seen
that the answer "no" is ex-
pected.
IV,
When there is a double ques-
tion asked, Utrum, "whether,"
(or nwn or ne), is used, fol-
lowed by an, " or," as^
Utrum est puer an puella dili-
gentior ?
"Whether is the boy or the girl more
industrious ?
Utrum need not, however, be
translated, as it is quite enough
to say
Is the boy or girl more industrious 1
Neither, indeed, need Utrum
be put in in Latin, but it may
be left out in the same way as
"whether" is left out in Eng-
lish, for it matters not whether
we say
Utrum est puer an puella dili-
gentior ?
or
Est puer an puella diligentior ?
V.
In indirect questions the Verb
is put in the Subj. Mood
He asks who you are.
Eogat quis sis-
He asks whether the boy or girl is
more industrious.
Rogat utrura puer an puella sit
di.igentior
110
NEW EAST LATIN PEIMER.
There are Eight kinds of Pro-
nouns
1. Personal. 5. Definitive.
2. Reflexive. 6. Relative.
3. Possessive. 7. Interrogative.
4. Demonstrative. 8. Indefinite.
1. Personal Pronouns are
1. Ego, I. 3. Nos, We.
2. Tu, Thou. 4. Vos, Ye.
2. Reflexive-
Be (sese), himself, herself, itself,
themselves.
8. Possessive
1. Meus, my, mine.
2. Tuus, thy, thine, your.
3. Suus, his own, her own, &c.
4. Cujus, a, um,
6. Noster, our.
6. Vester, your.
PRONOUNS.
4. Demonstrative
1. Is, that (he, she, it).
2. Hie, this (near me),
3. Ille, that (yonder).
4. Iste, that (near you).
5. Definitive
Idem, same. Ipse, self.
6. Relative
Qui, who or which.
7. Interrogative
Quis, who or what ?
8. Indefinite
Quis, any one.
N.B. 2 D's, 2 I's, 2 E's, 2 P's,
Will give the Pronouns eight
with ease.
The Personal Pronouns, ego,
tu, nos, vos, and the Demon-
strative Pronouns, ille, illi, are
sometimes used as the Nomina-
tive Case to the Verb where no
other Nominative is expressed
or evidently understood.
Amo means Ego amo, I love.
Anias Tu amas, Thou lovest.
Amat ,, Ille amat, He loves.
Amamus ,, Nos amamus, We love.
Arnatis Vos aiuatts, Ye love.
Amant Illi aiuant, They love.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
II.
But this Personal Pronoun
is not generally expressed,
except for the purpose of
emphasis.
J am walking in the garden,
Ambulo (not ego ambulo) in horto.
III.
But if I wish to show some
distinction between what / am
doing and what somebody else
is doing, I must use ego.
I am walking in the garden, you are
sitting in the house.
Ego ambulo in horto, tu sedes in
domo.
PRONOUNS.
Ill
EEFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
The Reflexive Pronoun se is
often misunderstood, and there-
fore misplaced.
The master said
writing.
'that he 1
TJte master praised the boy and said
" that he " was good.
In the first sentence the man
is speaking of himself, so we
must use " se." In the second
sentence the man is speaking of
the boy, so we must use "eum."
Magister dixit se scribere.
Magister laudavit puerum et dixit
eum esse bonum.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
The Possessive Pronouns, like
Adjectives, agree with their Sub-
stantives, and THAT ALONE.
He was reading his book.
She was reading her book.
They were reading their book.
Must be all turned into suum
librum,
II.
Notice the difference between
ejits, and suus.
The boy was reading his (own) book.
Puer legebat suum librum.
The boy was sitting near his brother
and reading his book.
Puer sedebat prope fratrem et lege-
bat ejus (i.e., his brother's) librum.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
III.
Note that ' you" in English is
both singular and plural tu
and vos ; and " your" is both
" tuus" "and tester," be care-
ful whether you are speaking to,
or of one person or more than
one.
Wliat are you doing, my boy ?
Quid agis, puer ?
What are you doing, my boys ?
Quid agitis, pueri ?
Soldier, hasten your flight.
Miles, matura tuam fugam.
Soldiers, hasten your flight.
Milites, maturate vestram fugam.
The distinction between hie, ille
and isle must be remembered :
hie means " this near me," ille
"that yonder, "pointing at some-
thing at some distance, and istc,
"that of yours, or that by you."
Boy, do you see this book J
Videsne hunc librum, puer ?
Boy, give me that book (yonder).
Da mihi ilium librum, puer.
Boy, give me that book of yours
near you).
Da rnitii ^st^tm librum puer
112
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
PREPOSITIONS.
I.
The Preposition must stand
1. Either immediately before the
word that it governs.
2. Or before the Adjective agreeing
with that word.
3. Or before a Genitive depending
on that word.
Milites ibant trans agros hostium.
Milites ibant trans fertiles agros
hostium.
Milites ibant trans hostium fertiles
agros.
Tenus, however, follows its
case, which is sometimes a
Genitive. So also do versus
and versum.
II.
A, ab for by is used of an
Agent, but not to express the
instrument.
The man was killed by me.
Vir occisus est a me (agent) .
The man was killed by a stone.
Vir occisua est lapide (instrument).
Ad is used after Verbs of
motion, but not before names
of Towns, etc.
I He was going to the city.
Ibat ad urbem.
He was going to Rome.
Ibat Romam.
III.
Cum is not used ordinarily
for " with," unless it may be
turned into " together with,"
" along with,"
The Icing went with (together with)
his legions.
Rex ivit cum legionibus.
The king fought with his sword.
Rex pugnavit gladio.
In (in) is used before ordinary
words, but not before a name
of a Town, or a Noun denoting
Time when, as
The king was sitting in the garden.
Rex sedebat in horto.
The king was fighting in Italy.
Rex pugnabat in Italia.
The king was living in Carthage
(i.e. at Carthage).
Rex vivebat Carthagine.
In winter the cold is intense.
Hieme frigus est magnum.
In, when it is followed by the
Abl. signifies rest in
Sedeo in domo.
In, when it is followed by the
Ace., signifies motion into, or
on to or to,
Festino in domum.
For list of Prepositions, see p. 58.
END OF PART II.
PART III. IRREGULAR VERBS.
PART III. IRREGULAR VERBS.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
1. Irregular Verbs, Conj. I. . 117
2. Irregular Verbs, Conj. II. . 117
3. Irregular Verbs,' Conj. III.
(a) Perfect at, Snp ne turn 119
(b) xi, , xum 119
(c) si, , sum 119
(d) si, , turn 120
(e) psi, , ptum 120
(/) ui, , turn 120
(g) ui, No Supine 121
(/i) in, Supine turn 121
(i) with Reduplica-
tion - r Supine turn, sum 122
(fc) Perfect di, Supine sum 123
(I) Compounds of do . . 123
(m) Verbs that cannot be
arranged under previous
headings 123
4. Verbs in io of Conj. III. . 124
5. Irregular Verbs, Conj. IV. . 125
6. Principal Neuter Verbs . . 125
7. Principal Verbs both Active
and Neuter 126
8. Deponent Verbs
1. Regular 127
2. Irregular 128
9. Quasi-Passives and Semi-
Deponents 129
10. Compounds of Sum . . . 130
11. Eo . . . 130
12. Verbs similar in spelling . 131
13. with different meanings!32
PAGE
14. Verbs with no Perfect . . 132
15. Verbs with no Supine . . 133
16. Verbs with neither Perfect
nor Supine 134
17. Verbs with two Supines . . .134
18. Two or more Supines from
the same Verb . . . .135
19. Supines somewhat similar
from different Verbs . . 136
20. Perfects somewhat similar
that come from different
Verbs 137
21. Principal Inceptive Verbs . 139
1. With Perfect and Supine.
2. With Perfect only.
3. Without Perfect or Supine.
22. Frequentative Verbs . . .140
23. Desiderative Verbs . . . 140
24. Impersonal Verbs . . . 141
25. Impersonate relating to the
weather 142
26. Specimen of an Impersonal
Verb in full . . . . .112
27. Anomalous Verbs .... 142
28. Irregularities of Edo . . .143
29. Defective Verbs .... 143
30. Fari, to speak 145
31. Age, Ave, etc 145
32. Irregular Verbs (alphabetically
arranged) .... 146-151
113
PART III. IRREGULAR VERBS.
It is to be noted throughout that forms thus marked * occur only in compounds.
IRREGULAR VERBS CONJUGATION I.
Crepo crepui crepitum creak.
Cubo cubui cubitum lie.
Domo domui domitum tame.
Mico micui glitter,
Plico *plicui *plicitum fold.
Sono sonui sonitum sound.
Tono toiiui tonitum thunder,
Veto vetui yetitum forbid.
Seco secui sectum cut.
Do dedi datum give.
Sto steti statum stand.
Juvo jiivi jutum help.
Lavo lavi lotum wash.
IRREGULAR VERBS CONJUGATION II.
Deleo delevi deletum blot out*
Fleo flevi fletum weep.
*Pleo *plevi *pletum fill.
Neo nevi netum spin.
Ardeo arsi arsum take fire.
Fulgeo fulsi glitter.
Hsereo heesi heesum stick.
Jubeo jussi jussum command.
117
118
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
Maneo
mansi
man sum
remain.
Mulcco
mulsi
mulsum
soothe.
Rideo
risi
risum
laugli.
Suadeo
suasi
suasum
advise.
Urgeo
ursi
press.
Lugeo
luxi
mourn.
Luceo
luxi
shine.
Mordeo
uiomordi
morsum
lite.
Pendeo
pependi
pensum
hang, (intr.)
Spondeo
spopondi
sponsum
pledge.
Tondeo
totondi
tonsum
shear.
Prandeo
prandi
pransum
lunch.
Sedeo
sedi
sessum
sit.
Video
vidi
visum
see.
Foveo
fovi
fotum
cherish.
Moveo
movi
mo turn
move.
Voveo
vovi
Yotum
vow.
Caveo
cavi
cautum
beware.
Faveo
favi
fautum
favour.
Doceo
docui
doctum
teach.
C mistum ")
Misceo
miscui
C mixtum )
mix.
Torreo
torrui
tosfcum
roast
Teneo
tenui
tentum
hold.
Augeo
auxi
auctum
increase, (trans.)
Indulgeo
indulsi
indultum
be indulgent.
Torquco
torsi
tor turn
twist.
Audco
ausus sum
^)
( dare.
Gandco
Solco
gavisus sum
solitus sum
f scmi-
\ deponent.
\ rejoice.
' be wont.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VEKBS.
119
CONJUGATION III.
All the Verbs of the Third Conjugation are of themselves
BO irregular that they require to be classed in some such way
as the following.
I. PERFECT arc, SUPINE turn.
Cingo
cinxi
cinctnm
surround.
Coquo
coxi
coctum
cools.
Dico
dixi
dictum
say.
Duco
duxi
ductum
lead.
Fingo
finxi
fictum
fashion.
Jurigo
junxi
junctum
join.
Pingo
pinxi
pictum
paint.
Rego
rexi
rectum
rule.
*Stinguo
*sfcinxi
*stinctum
quench.
Struo
struxi
structum
pile.
Tego
texi
tectum
cover.
Tinguo
tinxi
tinctum
dye.
Traho
traxi
tractum
draw.
Unguo
unxi
nnctnm
anoint.
Veho
vexi
vectum
carry.
Vivo
vixi
victum
live.
II. PERFECT
%i, SUPINE
xum.
Figo
fixi
fixum
$*.
Flecto
fiexi
flexum
bend.
Fluo
fluxi
fluxum
flow.
Necto
nexi (nexui)
nexum
bind.
III. PERFECT
si, SUPINE
sum.
Cedo
cessi
ccssum
yield.
Claudo
clausi
clausum
shut.
Divido
divisi
divisum
divide.
120
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
Lsedo
lassi
Isesum
hurt.
Ludo
lusi
lusuin
play.
Mergo
mersi
mersum
drown.
Mitto
misi
missum
send.
Plaudo
plausi
plausum
applaud.
Premo
pressi
pressum
press.
Eado
rasi
rasum
scrape.
Rodo
rosi
rosum
gnaw.
Spargo
sparsi
sparsum
sprinkle.
Tergo
tersi
tersum
wipe.
Trudo
trusi
trusum
thrust.
Vado
*vasi
* vasum
go.
Velio
vulsi (velli)
vulsum
pluck.
Gero
Uro
IV. PERFECT si, SUPINE turn.
gessi
ussi
gestum
ustum
carry on.
burn.
V. PERFECT psi, SUPINE ptum.
Carpo
carpsi
carptum
pluck.
Como
compsi
cornptum
adorn.
Demo
dempsi
demptum
take away.
Nubo
nupsi
nu ptum
be married.
Promo
prompsi
promptum
take forth.
Repo
repsi
reptum
creep.
Scalpo
scalpsi
scalptum
scratch.
Scribo
scrips!
scriptum
write.
Serpo
serpsi
serpfcum
crawl.
Sumo
sum psi
sumptum
take.
Temno
tempsi
temptum
despise.
VI. PERFECT ui, SUPINE turn.
Acuo acui acutum sharpen.
Alo alui altum (alitum) nourish.
Arguo argui argutum prove.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
121
Colo colui cultum till.
Consulo consului consultum consult.
*Cumbo *cubui *cubifcum lie down.
Exuo exui exutum put off.
Fremo fremui fremitnm murmur.
Gemo genmi gemitam groan.
Grigno genui genifcum produce.
Imbuo imbai imbutum tinge.
Induo indui indutum put on.
Lao lui luitum wash, atone.
Minuo minui minutum lessen.
Occulo occului occnltum hide.
Pono posui posifcum place.
Ruo rui f rutum rush, fall.
Sero semi sertnm join.
Statuo statui statutum set up.
Strepo strepui strepitum roar.
Texo texui textum weave.
Tribuo tribui tributum assign.
Vomo vomui voniitum vomit.
t The Primer gives ruitum as supine, and ruiturum occurs in Ovid,
Met. iv. 460 ; but Andrews gives rutum. Cf . obrutus.
VII. PERFECT ui, NO SUPINE.
Metuo metal fear.
Nao nui nod.
Tremo tremui tremble.
Volo volui wish.
VIII. PERFECT vi, SUPINE turn.
Arcesso
arcessivi
arcessitnm send for.
Cerno
crevi
cretum sift.
Cresco
crevi
cretum grow.
Lacesso
lacessivi
lacessitum provoke.
Lino
levi
litum smear.
Nosco
iiovi (I/mow)
notum become acquainted
with,
122
CONJUGATION OP LATIN VERBS.
Pasco
pavi
pastum
feed.
Peto
petivi
petitum
ask.
Qusero
qnsesivi
quoesitum
seel .
Quiesco
quievi
quietum
rest.
Sero
sevi
satum
sow.
Sino
sivi
sifcum
allow.
Sperno
sprevi
spretum
despise.
Sterno
stravi
stratum
strew.
Snesco
suevi
suetum
be wont.
Tero
trivi
tritum
rub.
IX.
PERFECT WITH
REDUPLICATION :
SUPINE turn, sum.
Cado
cecidi
casum
fall.
Credo
cecidi
csesum
cut, beat } kill.
Cano
cecini
cantum
sing.
Curro
cucnrri
cursum
run.
Fallo
fefelli
falsum
deceive.
Parco
peperci
parsum
spare.
Pango
pepigi
pactum
fasten.
Pario
peperi
partum
bring forth.
Pello
pepuli
pulsum
drive.
Pendo
pependi
pensum
weigh.
Pungo
pupugi
punctum
prick.
Tango
tetigi
tactum
touch .
Tendo
tetendi
{ensum &
stretch.
tentum
Tollo
sustuli
sublatum
take up.
Tundo
tutudi
tunsum
thump.
PERFECT WITH
REDUPIJCATION,
NO SUPINE.
Disco
didici
learn.
Posco
poposci
demand.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
123
X. PERFECT di, SUPINE sum.
*Cando
Edo
*cendi
edi
*censum
esura
set on fire,
eat.
*Fendo
*fendi
*fensum
strike.
Fin do
fidi
fissum
cleave.
Fundo
Pando
Prehendo
Scan do
fudi
pandi
prehendi
scandi
fasum
pansuin (pas
prehensum
scans nm
pour.
:sum) spread,
grasp,
climb.
Scindo
scidi
scissum
tear.
XL
Abdo
Addo
Condo
Credo
Dedo
Edo
Per do
Prodo
Reddo
Subdo
Trado
Vendo
COMPOUNDS OF do : PERFECT didi, SUPINE ditum.
abdidi
abditum
-didi
-ditnm
V
hide.
add.
found, hide.
believe.
give up.
give forth.
lose.
betray.
restore.
substitute.
deliver.
sell.
XII. VERBS THAT CANNOT BE ARRANGED UNDER PREVIOUS
HEADINGS.
Ago
Bibo
Emo
Fran go
Lego
Linquo
Meto
Bumpo
Sisto
egi
bibi
emi
fregi
legi
liqai
messai
rupi
stiti
actnm
bibifcum
emptum
fractum
lectum
^lictum
messum
ruptum
*statum
do.
drink.
buy, take.
break.
choose, read.
leave.
to mow.
break.
make to stand.
124
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
Solvo 1
Velio 2
Verto
Vinco
Volvo 1
1 These might have been included in those making Perfect vi, Supine
turn, but they only make vi because there is a v in the present.
2 This because it also makes vulsi has been included in those making
Perfect si, Supine sum (see p. 4).
solvi
solufcum
loosen.
velli & vulsi
verti
vulsum
versum
pull,
turn.
vici
volvi
victum
volutum
conquer,
roll
VERBS IN io or THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
Allicio
allexi
Capio
cepi
Cupio
cupivi
Elicio
elicui
Facio
feci
Fodio
fodi
Fugio
fugi
Jacio
jeci
Pario
peperi
Quatio
quassi
Rapio
rapui
* Specie
*spexi
allectura
captum
cupltum
elicitum
factum
fossum
fngitum
jactum
partum
quassum
rapfcum
^spectum
Sapio
sapi(v)i
allure,
talce.
desire,
entice forth,
make,
dig.
flee
throw,
bring forth,
shake,
seize,
espy.
to taste of, be
wise.
PECULIARITIES OF SOME COMPOUND VEEBS.
EEGO.
Surgo (sub-rego) surrexi surrectuin arise.
Pergo (per-rego) perrexi perrectum go on.
LEGO.
Most of its compounds make -legi, -leetum. But diligo, intelligo,
negligo, -lexi, -lectum.
The Compounds of Reduplicated Verbs seldom retain the reduplication,
e.g., occldo (ob-caedo), occldi, except disco, posco, curro, do, sto.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
125
IRREGULAR V^BBS CONJUGATION IV.
Aperio
Operio
Salio
Sepelio
Sancio
Vincio
aperui
operui
salui
sepelivi
sanxi
vinxi
apertum
opertum
saltum
sepultum
sanctum,
vinctum
open,
cover,
leap,
"bury.
consecrate.
bind.
Fulcio
Haurio
Sarcio
Seepio
Sentio
fulsi
hausi
sarsi
ssepsi
sensi
Comperio comperi
Reperio repperi
Venio veni
fultum
haustum
sartum
seeptum
sen sum
compertmn
repertum
ventum
prop.
drain.
mend.
in.
feel.
find,
discover.
come.
PEINCIPAL NEUTER VERBS.
Neuter Verbs indicate a state or an action 'not exercised upon an object :
they take an accusative of kindred meaning, e.g. " Duram servit servi-
tutem." There are exceptional uses in the poets, e.g., " Ire vias."
Prop. I. i. 18. " Currimus sequor." Virg. Mn. III. 191. Many of them
too are followed by the accusative of part affected, e.g. tremit artus,
dolet caput, etc.
Algeo algere
Ambulo ambularo
Ardeo ardere
Oaleo calere
Clango clangere
alsi be cold.
ambulavi ambulatum walk.
arsi arsum take fire.
calui be warm.
resound.
126
CONJUGATION OP LATIN VERDS.
Conniveo
connivere
( connivi ")
| connixi j
shut the eyes.
Curro
currere
cucurri
cnrsum
run.
Cubo
cubare
cubui
cubitum
lie.
Eo
ire
Ivi, ii
itum
go.
Ferveo
C fervere ^
( fervere ]
C ferbui ]
( fervi )
boil
Floreo
florere
florui
flourish.
Frigeo
frigere
be cold.
Jaceo
jacere
jacui
jaciitura
lie.
No
nare
navi
swim.
Pendeo
pendere
pependi
pensum
hang.
Salio
sal ire
salui
saltum
leap.
Sedeo
seel ere
sedi
sessum
sit.
Servio
servire
servivi(ii)
servifcura
serve.
Stp
stare
steti
statum
stand.
Venio
venire
veni
ventu in
come.
Vigeo
vigere
flourish.
Vireo
virere
be green.
Vivo
vivere
vixi
victnm
live.
PRINCIPAL YEEBS WHICH ARE BOTH ACTIVE AND
NEUTER.
Doleo
dolere
dolui
dolitam
( grieve for.
Fleo
flere
flevi
fletura
weep, weep for.
Gemo
gemere
gemui
gemitam
groan, sigh over.
Horreo
horrere
C stand on end,
( shudder at.
Incipio
incipere
incepi
inceptum
begin.
ungeo
lugere
luxi
mourn, lament.
Manco
manere
mansi
mansnra
remain, await
CONJUGATION OP LATIN VERBS.
127
Ruo
mere
rui
Sapio
sapere
sapivi(ii)
Sitio
sitire
sitivi(ii)
Tremo
tremere
tremui
Verfco
vertere
verti
Vigilo
vigil are
vigilavi
rutum
( rush, cast down
\ or up.
be wise, know.
( be thirsty, thirst
( for.
( tremble, tremble
( at.
versum turn.
S watch, watch
through.
vigilatum
COMMON DEPONENT VERBS.
Conj. I.
Arbitror
Miror
Moror
Spatiov
Tester
Vagor
Venor
A. Regular.
arbitrari arbitratus sum
mirari miratus sum
thirilc.
wonder at.
delay.
walk.
bear witness.
wander.
hunt.
Conj. II. Mereor
Misereor
Polliceor
Vereor
merer! merifcus sum
deserve,
pity,
promise,
fear.
Conj. III. Utor uti usus sum use.
Mostly classed ivith the irregular verbs.
Conj. IV. Partior partiri parti his sum divide.
128
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
PRINCIPAL DEPONENT VEEBS.
B.
Irregular.
Conjugation II.
Fateor
fateri
fassus sum
confess.
Medeor
mederi
lieal.
Keor
reri
ratus sum
tliinlc.
Conjugation III.
Amplector
amplecti
amplexus sum
embrace.
Apiscor
apisci
aptus sum
obtain.
Commimscor
comminisci
commentus sum
devise.
Expergiscor
expergisci
experrectus sum
waJce up.
Fatiscor
fatisci
fessus sum
grow weary.
Fruor
frui
fruitus sum
enjoy.
Fungor
fungi
functus sum
discharge.
Gradior
gradi
gressus sum
step.
Irascor
irasci
iratus sum
be angry.
Ivabor
labi
lapsus sum
glide.
Loquor
loqui
locutus sum
speak.
Morior
mori
morfcuus sum
die.
Nanciscor
nancisci
nactus sum
obtain.
Nascor
nasci
natus sum
be born.
Nitor
niti
( nisus 7
> sum
(. mxus )
strive.
Obliviscor
oblivisci
oblltus sum
forget.
Paciscor
pacisci
pacfcus sum
bargain.
Patior
pati
passus sum
suffer.
Proficiscor
proficisci
profectus sum
set out.
Queror
queri
questus sum
complain.
Sequor
sequi
secutus sum
follow.
Ulciscor
ulcisci
ultus sum
avenge.
Utor
uti
usus sum
use.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
Conjugation IV.
Assentior assentiri assensus sum agree to.
Experior
Mefcior
experiri
metiri
expertus sum
mensus sum
try.
measure.
Opperior
Ordior
Orior
opperiri
ordlri
orlri
oppertus sum
orsus sum
ortus sum
wait for.
begin,
rise.
QUASI PASSIVES AND SEMI-DEPONENT.
I. ACTIVE FORM WITH PASSIVE MEANING.
Exulo cxulare exulavi exulatum be banished.
Fio 1 fieri factus sum be made.
Liceo licere licui lioitnm .
auction.
Vapulo 2 vapulare vapulavi be beaten.
Veneo 3 venire venii vemtum be on sale.
II. ACTIVE PRESENT WITH PERFECT OF PASSIVE FORM.
Audeo
audere
ausas sum
dare.
Fido
fiuere
fisussum
trust.
Gaudeo
Soleo
gaudere
solere
gavisus sum
sulitus sum
rejoice,
be wont.
III. ACTIVE PERFECT WITH DEPONENT PERFECT PARTICIPLE.
Ceno cenavi ceoatns sup.
Juro juravi juratus swear.
Prandeo prandi pransus dine.
Also Nupta wedded.
Potus having drunk.
1 Fio, pass, ol facto. 2 Vapulo, pass, of verbero. 3 Veneo, pass, of ven do.
I
130
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
COMPOUNDS or SUM.
Absum
abesse
C abfui ") ,
lafoi j be
absent.
Adsum
adesse
affui
present.
Desum
deesse
defui
wanting.
Insum
inesse
infui
in.
Intersil m
interesse
interfui
among.
Obsum
obesse
obfui
in the way of.
Prsesum
prseesse
prsefui
before.
Prosum
prodesse
profui
useful.
Subsum
subesse
under.
Supersum
superesse
superfui
over, remain.
COMPOUNDS OP Eo.
Abeo
abire
abivi abifcum
go away.
Adeo
ad ire
adivi aditum
go to.
Anteo
anteire
anteivi
go before.
Circumeo
circumire
circumivi circuitum
go round.
Coeo
coire
coivi coitum
go together*
Exeo
exire
exivi exitura
go out.
Ineo
inire
inivi inifcum
go into
Intereo
interire
interi(v)i interitum
perish.
Obeo
obire
obivi obitum
encounter.
Pereo
perire
peri(v)i peritum
perish.
Praseo
praeire
praaivi prositum
go before
Prsetereo
pra8terire
prasterivi presfceritum
go by.
Prodeo
prodire
prodi(v)i proditum
go forth.
lledeo
red ire
redi(v)i reditum
return.
Subeo
subire
subl(v)i subitum
!go under,
undergo.
Trau sco
trans ire
transi(v)i transifcum
go over.
The Perfects of all these verbs have also the v left out ; as, obivi, obii,
etc., etc., which is, indeed, the more usual form. Where the v is bracketed
the long form is not given.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
VERBS SIMILAR IN SPELLING,*
THOUGH THEY HAVE TOTALLY DISTINCT MEANINGS.
131
Appello
appellare
appellavi
appellatum
call.
Appello
appellere
appuli
appulsum
land.
Compello
compellare
compel la vi
compellatum
address.
Compello
compellere
compuli
compulsum
compel.
Colligo
colligare
colligavi
colligatum
bind.
Colligo
colligere
collegi
collectum
collect.
Dico
dicare
dicavi
dicatum
devote.
Dlco
dicere
dixi
dictum
say.
Edo
edere
edidi
edit urn
give forth.
Edo
edere (esse)
edi
esum
eat.
Educo
educare
educavi
educatum
educate.
Educo
educere
eduxi
eductum
lead out.
Lego
legare
legavi
legatum
depute.
Lego
legere
legi
lectum
gather.
Occido
occidere
occidi
occasum
fall.
Occido
occidere
occidi
occisum
slay.
Sero
serere
serui
sertum
join.
Sero
serere
sevi
satum
sow.
Volo
volare
volavi
volatum
fly-
Volo
velle
volui
wish.
Est
3rd sing.
pres. indie, of
sum
I am.
Est
,, ,,
,, ,,
edo
I eat.
Nitere
inf. pres.
of niteo
shine.
Nitere
2nd sing.
imperat. pres.
of nitor
strive.
Oblitus
part. pass. pf. of oblino
smear.
Oblitus
part. pf. of obliviscor
forget.
Parere
inf. pres.
act. of pario
bring forth.
Parere
>i
, pareo
obey.
Venit-i
f 3rd. sing. pres. ind. of venio )
Venitj
\ 3rd. sing, perf . ind. of
3
come.
Venit
3rd. sing.
pres. ind. of veneo
be sold.
Notice that the quantities differ in many cases.
132 CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
CASES IN WHICH THE SAME VERB HAS DIFFERENT
MEANINGS.
These will often be found to be reducible to one idea thus,
LEGO means (1) To gather, select.
" Ilia legit calthas."
(2) To read.
" Plurimus orbe legor."
(3) To coast along, skim.
"Inarimen Prochytamque legit."
These come under the one idea of " gathering : " (1) to gather literally;
^2) to pick out the letters and words ; (3) to skim lightly over or pass
along. All these involve a notion of moving lightly along from one
thing to another as one does in gathering flowers.
Ruo means (1) To fall.
"B/uit alto e culmme Troja." Yirg. jEn.'ii.
(2) To rush.
" Quoquo scelesti ruitis ? " Hor.
(3) To throw up.
" Et ruit atram
Ad coelum picea crassus caligine nubem."
These all fall under the idea of " violent motion." " To be in violent
motion " (intransitive) ; " to put in violent motion " (transitive). The
motion may be in any direction up or down.
VERBS WHICH HAVE NO PERFECT.
Antecello
surpass.
Furo
rage.
Ambigo
waver.
Glubo
larJc, peel.
Frendo
gnash.
Labasco
resound.
Plecto punish.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
VERBS THAT HAVE NO SUPINE.
133
Algco
be cold.
Niteo
shine.
AD go
vex.
Nolo
be unwilling.
Antecello
surpass.
STuo
nod.
Audeo
dare.
Pateo
lie open.
Compesco
restrain.
Paveo
fear.
Coimiveo
winlc.
Plecto
punish.
Posco
demand.
Dego
live.
Possum
be able.
Disco
learn.
Psallo
play on harp.
Ferveo, fervo
Fido
Fio
Frigeo
Fulgeo
boil,
trust,
become,
be cold,
glitter.
Sapio
Scabo
Sileo
Soleo
Sterto
be wise,
scratch*
be silent,
be wont,
snore.
Gaudeo
rejoice.
Strideo, stride
creak.
Incesso
assail.
Timeo
fear.
Tremo
tremble.
Lateo
lie hid.
Tumeo
swell.
Lnceo
shine.
Turgeo
swell.
Lugeo
mourn.
Vergo
bend.
Malo
prefer.
Vigeo
flourish.
Metno
fear.
Vireo
be green.
Mico
glitter.
Yolo
wish.
Also following Inceptives :
conticesco
horresco
pallesco
crebresco
languesco
tumesco
delitesco
maturesco
vanesco
cxtimesco
obnmtesco
vesperasco
With many others.
134 CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
VERBS WHICH HAVE NEITHER PERFECT NOR SUPINE.
Ambigo waver. Furo
Anfcecello surpass. Plecto
Dignosco distinguish. Praecello
Also following Inceptives :-
hebesco labasco niitesco
And many others.
rage.
punish.
excel.
pueraseo
VERBS WHICH HAVE TWO SUPINES.
Alo alitum, altum feed.
Applico applicitum, applicatnm join.
Eneco enectum, enecatum kill.
Frendo fressum, fresum gnash
Frico frictnm, fricatum rub.
Frigo frictum, frixum parch.
Lavo lavatum, lautum, lotum wash.
Misceo mistum, mixtum mix.
Pando passum, pansum expand.
Pango panctum, pacturn fix.
Plico *plicitum, plicatum fold.
Poto potatum, potura drink.
Sancio sanctum, sancitura consecrate.
Tendo tentum, tensum stretch.
Tundo tumsum, tusum thump.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS. 135
Two OB MORE SUPINES FROM THE SAME VERB.
Alitum
Altum
i
Alo
feed.
AppKcitum
Applicatum
i
Applico
join
Enectum
Enecatum
(
Eneco
Ml.
Fressum
Fresum
i
Frendo
gnash.
Frictum
Fricatum
}
Frico
rub.
Frictum
Frixum
l
Frigo
parcli.
Lavatum
)
Lautum
[
Lavo
wash.
Lotum
)
Mi stum
Mixtum
}
Misceo
mix.
Passum
Pansum
!
Pan do
expand-.
Panctum
Pactum
1
Pan go
fix.
*Plicitum
Plicatum
}
Plico
fold.
Potatum
Potnm
}
Poto
drink.
Sanctum
Sancitum
)
Sancio
consecrate.
Tentnm
Tensnm
i
Tendo
stretch.
Tunsum
Tusum
1
Tundo
thump.
136
CONJUGATION OF LATIN YEEBS.
SUPINES SOMEWHAT SIMILAR THAT COME FROM
DIFFERENT VERES.
captum
carptum
capio
carpo
take,
pluclt.
casum
csesum
cado
caDdo
fall,
cut.
censnm
censeo
vote.
sensum
sentio
feel.
scitum
scisco
decree.
scitum
scio
knoiv.
sitnm
sino
allow.
citum
cieo
put in motion.
cessum
sessum
cedo
scdeo
yield,
sit.
cretum
cretnm
cerno
cresco
sift,
grow.
fixum
fictum
figo
fingo
fix.
fashion.
frictum
frico
rub.
fricfcum
frigo
parch.
genitum
gemitum
gigno
gemo
beget,
groan.
mansum
raaneo
remain.
mansum
mando
chew.
messum
meto
mow.
missu m
mitto
send.
mulsum
mulceo
soothe.
mnlsum
mulgeo
milk.
parsnm
partuin
parco
pario
spare,
bring forth.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
137
sessum
sensum
tensum(tuinj
tentum
textum
tectum
versum
versum
visum
visum
vinctum
victura
victum
vectura
sedere
sentire
tendo
teneo
texo
tego
verro
verto
viso
video
vincio
vinco
vivo
veho
sit.
feel.
stretch,
hold.
weave,
cover.
sweep.
turn.
visit.
see.
bind,
conquer.
live,
carry.
PERFECTS SOMEWHAT SIMILAR THAT COME FROM
DIFFERENT VERES.
cecidi
cecidi
I
cado
caedo
fall,
cut.
crevi
crevi
1
cerno
cresco
sift,
grow.
scivi
scivi
!
scisco
scio
seek to know, decree
know.
edi
j
edo
eat.
edidi
edo
publish.
fixi
finxi
i
figo
fingo
fi*. _
fashion.
frixi
frixi
!
frigesco
frigo
grow cold.
parch.
fulsi
fulsi
1
fulcio
fulgeo
prop,
glitter.
138
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VEKBS.
luxi ")
luceo
shine.
luxi 3
lugeo
mourn.
mandi *)
mando
chew.
mansi 3
maneo
remain ,
messui ")
metui 3
meto
metuo
reap,
fear.
nmlsi )
mulsi J
nrulceo
mulgeo
soothe,
milk.
nactus ")
natus 3
nanciscor
nascor
obtain,
be born.
orsus i
ausus
ordior
audeo
begin,
dare.
ortus J
orior
rise.
pavi ")
pasco
feed.
pavi 3
paveo
fear.
peperci ")
peperi 3
parco
pario
spare,
bring forth.
pependi 7
pependi 3
pendeo
pendo
hang,
cause to hang, weigh.
pinxi |
pinsi (pinsui) )
pingo
pinso
paint,
pound.
quivi )
queo
be able.
quievi /
quiesco
rest.
scivi ")
scio
know
civi 3
cieo
put in motion.
vici j
vinxi
vinco
vincio
conquer
bind
vixi J
vivo
live
CONJUGATION OP LATIN VEKBS.
PRINCIPAL INCEPTIVE VERBS.
139
These, which are also called Inchoative Verbs, express the
beginning of action, and are of the 3rd Conjugation.
(a) THOSE WITH PERFECT AND SUPINE.
Abolesco
Adolesco
Coalesce
Concupisco
Consuesco
Convalesco
Exardesco
Inveterasco
-ere abolevi abolitum pass away.
-ere adolevi adultum grow up.
-ere coalui coalitum grow together.
-ere concupivi concupitum desire.
-ere consuevi consuetum get accustomed.
-ere convalui convalitum get well.
-ere exarsi exarsum blaze forth.
-ere inveteravi inveteratum become old.
Obdormisco
Scisco
-ere obdormivi obdormitum fall asleep.
-ere scivi scitum decree.
Mansuesco
Revivisco
-ere mansuevi mansueturu grow tame.
-ere revixi revictum come to life
again.
(/?) THOSE WITH PERFECT ONLY :
Consenesco
Conticesco
ere consenui grow old.
-ere conticui become silent.
Delitesco
-ere delitui lie hid.
Duresco
Effloresco
-ere dnrui grow hard.
-ere efflorui bloom.
Expavesco
Horresco
-ere expavi grow alarmed.
-ere horrui shudder.
Incalesco
Incandesco
Incanesco
-ere incalui get warm.
-ere incandui glow.
-ere incanui become white.
Increbresco
Ingemisco
Illucesco
Languesco
Maturesco
-ere increbrui become frequent.
-ere ingemui groan over.
-ere illuxi grow light.
-ere langui grow languid.
-ere maturui grow ripe.
140
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
Obmutesco
-ere
obmutui
Obstupesco
-ere
obstupui
Pallesco
-ere
pallui
Patesco
-ere
patui
Rubesco
-ere
rubui
Tepesco
-ere
tepui
Viresco
-ere
virui
become mute,
become amazed,
grow pale,
become open,
become red.
become warm,
become green.
(y) WITHOUT PERFECT OR SUPINE.
Hebesco -ere
Ingravesco -ere
grow blunt. Labasco
grow heavy. Mitesco
Puerasco become a boy
begin to totter,
grow ripe.
PRINCIPAL FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.
These signify repeated or intenser action, and are of the
1st Conjugation. Such are :
Canto
sing.
Haesito
stick fast.
Capto
catch up.
Lectito
gather often.
fCurso
run hither and thither
Merso
dip in.
Cursito
run hither and thither
Minitor
threaten.
Clamito
cry aloud.
Pulso
strike.
Dicto
say often.
fRogito
asJc often.
Dictito
say often.
Salto
dance.
Gesto
bear.
fVentito
come often.
These are all conjugated regularly, -are, -avi, -atum, except those
marked f, which have no perfect or supine.
Minitor, -art, -atus sum, deponent.
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
These signify " desire to do a thing," and are of the 4th
Conjugation.
Esurio, esurire, esuritura wish to eat.
Parturio, parturire, partuiivi & -ii, am in labour,
wish to produce.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS. 141
PRINCIPAL IMPERSONAL VERBS.
These are mostly of the 2nd Conjugation, and are con-
jugated as such only in 3rd Person Singular of Finite Verb
and in the Infinitive.
CONJUGATION 1. INFINITIVES REGULAR IN are.
Constat constitit it is acknowledged.
Delectat it delights.
Juvat juvit it pleases.
CONJUGATION 2. INFINITIVES REGULAR IN ere.
Attinefc attinuit it relates..
Dedecet dedecuifc it misbecomes.
Decet decuifc it becomes.
Libet libuit & libitum est it pleases.
Licet licuit & licitum est it is lawful.
Liquet liquit & licuit it is clear.
Miseret miseruit & miseritum est it pities.
Oportet oportuit it behoves.
Pertinet pertinuit it belongs.
Piget piguit & pigitum est it irJcs.
Pcenitet pcenituit it repents.
Pudet puduit & puditum est it shames.
Tsedet teeduit & perteesum est it disgusts.
CONJUGATION 3. INFINITIVES REGULAR IN ere.
Accidit accidit it happens.
Contingit contigit it befalls
CONJUGATION 4. INFINITIVES REGULAR IN ire.
Convenit convenit it suits.
Evenit evenit it turns out.
Interest interfuit interesse it imports.
Refer t retulifc referre it concerns.
142
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
IMPERSONATE RELATING TO THE WEATHER, ETC.
Advesperascit
advesperascere
-avit
it approaches
evening.
Fulgurat
fulgurare
it lightens.
Illucescit
illucescere
illuxifc
it groius light.
Lucescifc
lucescere
it dawns.
Ningifc
ningere
ninxifc
it snows.
Pluifc
pluere
pluit (pluvit)
it rains.
Tonafc
tonare
tonuit
it thunders.
Vesperascifc
vesperascere
vesperavit
it becomes
evening.
SPECIMEN or AN IMPERSONAL VERB IN FULL.
Indie. Mood. Conj. Mood. Inf. Mood.
Pres.
Fut.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Fut. Perf.
P. Perf.
op or teat
Oportet
Oportebifc
Oporfcebat
Oporfcuit
Oportuerit
Oportuerat oportuissefc.
oporteret
oportuerit
oportere.
oportuisse.
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
J.e., Verbs ivhich do not form their parts according to Rule.
Eo
ire
Fero
ferre
Fio
fieri
Malo
malle
Nolo
nolle
Possum
posse
Queo
quire
Volo
velle
ivi (ii), itum
tuli, latum
factus sum
malui
nolui
potui
qaivi
volui
go.
I ear.
am made,
had rather,
am unwilling,
am able,
am able,
wish.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS. 143
THE IRREGULARITIES IN EDO (to Eat) ARE :
Indicative Present.
Act. Edis or es edit or esfc editis or estis.
Pass, 3 sing. Editur or estur.
Imperative Present.
Act. Ede or es, edite or este.
Imperative Future.
Act. Edito or esto, editote or estate.
Conjunctive Present.
Act. Edam or edim.
Conjunctive Imperfect.
Act. Ederem or essem.
Pass. Ederetur or essetur.
Infinitive.
Edere or esse.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
INQOAM, I Say.
Ind. Pres. Inquam ' inquis inquit.
inquimus inquiunt.
Fut. Simple. inquies inquiet.
Imperf. inquiebat.
inquiebant
Per/. inquisti inquit.
Imperative Pres. inque, inquite.
Imperative Fut. inquito.
Aio, I Say.
Ind. Pres-. Aio ais ait, aiunt.
Ind. Imp. Aicbam, etc., regular, sing, and plural.
CUHJ. Pres. aias aiat, aiant.
144
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS.
DEFECTIVE YERBS (continued).
The following have no present stem, and therefore no
tenses derived from that stem.
Coepi, I have begun or began.
Odi, I hate.
Memini, I remember.
Indicative Mood.
Perf.
( Coep-
< Od-
' Memin-
j i, isti, it,
j imus, istis, erunt.
Pluperf.
( Ccep-
< Od-
{- Memin-
( eram, eras, erat,
f eramus, eratis, erant.
Put. Perf.
r Ccep-
\ Od-
( ero, eris, erifc,
Conjunctive Mood.
Perf.
(Co3p-
<^ Od-
' Memin-
erim, eris, erit,
erimus, eritis, erint.
( r^ P ' \ issem, isses, isset,
Pluperf. Od- _ fi ss emus,issetis,issent.
v. Memin- ;
Imperative Mood, memento, mementote.
Verb Infinite.
Infinitive. Perf. Coepisse odisse
Part. Perf. Pass. Coeptus osus.
Part. Fut. Act. Coepturus osurus.
N.B. Perf. Memini I remember. Odi
P.P. Memineram ( I was .remembering, Oderam
\ remembered.
P.P. Meminero I shall remember. Odero
memnsso.
I hate.
(I was hating }
( hated.
I shall hate.
CONJUGATION OF LATIN VERBS. 145
FARI, to Speak.
The forms in brackets only found in compounds,
e.g. affari, effari, profari, prjefari.
Ind. Pres. Fatur, (famur), (famini).
Fut. Fabor, (faberi ), fabitur, (fabimur).
Imp erf. (Fabar).
Per/. Fatus sum, etc.
Pluperf. Fatus eram, etc.
Conj. Imperf. (Farer).
Perf. Fatus sim, etc.
Pluperf. Fatus, essem, etc.
Imperative Present. Fare.
Infinitive. Fari. Ger. Fandi, fando. Supine. Fatu.
Part. Pres. Fantem, fantis, etc. Part. Perf. Fatus, a, um.
Gerundive. Fandus.
AGE, AYE, ETC.
Age, agite, come.
Apage, "begone.
Ave (sometimes spelt have), avete, aveto, avere (Infin.) hail !
Salve, salvete, salveto, salvebis (fut.), salvere (Infin), hail I
Cedo, cedite or cette, give here.
Quaeso, pi. quassumus, entreat.
Vale, valete, valeto, valebis (fut.), valere (Infin.), farewell.
Infit, lie begins. (Only in this form.)
146
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
IRREGULAR VERBS,
ALPHABETTCALLY ARRANGED.
NOTE. Those marked with an asterisk are only used in compounds.
Abolesco, -levi, abolitum, 3. to pass away.
Accendo, -di, -sum, 3. to set on fire.
Acuo, acui, acutum, 3. to sharpen.
Adolesco, -levi, adultum, 3. to grow up.
Agnosco, -novi, -nltum, 3. to recognise.
Ago, egi, actum, 3. to do.
Mo, ais, ait, I say, defect.
Algeo, alsi, 2. to be cold.
Allicio, allexi, allectum r 3. to allure.
Alo, alui, alltum or altum, 3. to nourish.
Ambigo, 3. to waver.
Aniicio, amicui, amictum, 4, to clothe.
Ango, anxi, 3. to squeeze.
Antecello, 3. to surpass.
Aperio, aperui, apertum, 4. to open.
Appello, appuli, appulsum, 3. to land.
Applico, applicui applicavi, applicltum
applicatum, 1. to apply.
Arcesso, -Ivi, -itum, 3. to send for.
Ardeo, arsi, arsum, 2. to takeffre.
Arguo, argui, argutum, 3. to prove.
Audeo, ausus sum, 2. to dare.
Augeo, auxi, auctum,. 2. to increase.
Bibo, bibi, bibitum, 3. to drink.
Cado, cecldi, casum, 3. to fall.
Csedo,cecMi, Cesum r 3. i&cut r beat, Hill.
Caleo, calui, 2. to be warm.
*Cando, *cendi, *censum, 3. 'o set on fire.
Cano, ceclni, cantum, 3 to sing.
Capesso, -sivi, -sltum, 3. to seize.
Capio, cepi, captum, 3. to take.
Carpo, carpsi, carptum r 3. to plucJc.
Caveo, cavi, cautum, 2. to beware.
Cedo, cessi, cessmn, 3. to yield.
Censeo, censui, censum, 2. to vote.
Cerno, crevi, cretum, 3. to sift.
Cieo, civi, cltum, 2. to stir up.
Cingo, cinxi, cinctum, 3. to surround.
Clango, 3. to resound.
Claudo, clausi, clausum, 3. to shut.
Coalesce, coalui, coalitom, 3. to grow
together.
Cognosce, -novi, -nltnm, 3. know.
Cogo, coegi, coactum, 3. to compel.
Colligo, collegi, collectum, 3. to collect.
Colo, colui, cultum, 3. to till.
Como, compsi, comptum, 3. to adorn.
Compello, -puli, -pulsum, 3. to compel.
Comperio, -p^ri, -pertum, 4. ascertain.
Compesco, compescui, 3. to restrain.
Concupisco, -ivi, -itum, 3. to desire.
Conm'veo, -nivi and -nixi, 2. to winJc.
Conseneaco, consenui, 3. to grow old.
Consuesco, consuevi, consuetum, 3. to
get accustomed.
Consulo, -sului, -sultum, 3. to consult.
Conticesco, conticui, 3. to become sileni.
Convalesco, -valui, -valitum, 3. toget welU
Coquo, coxi, coctum, 3. to cook.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
147
Crcpo, crSpui, crepltum, 1. to creak.
Cresco, crevi, cretum, 3. to grow.
*Cubo, *cubui, *cuWtum, 1. to lie down.
Cudo, cudi, cusum, 3. to fashion.
Gumbo, cubui, cubltum, 3. to lie down.
Cupio, cupivi, cupltum, 3. to desire.
Curro, cttcurri, cursurn, 3. to run.
Defendo, defendi, defensum, 3. to defend.
Dego, 3. to live.
Deleo, delevi, deletum, 2. to blot out.
Delitesco, delitui, 3. to lie hid.
Demo, dempsi, demptum, 3. to taJce away.
Depso, -sui, -stum, 3. to Jcnead.
Dico, dixi, dictum, 3. to say.
Dignosco, 3. to distinguish.
Diligo, dilexi, dilectum, 3. to love.
Dlmico, -avi and -ui, -atum, 1. to fight.
Disco, dldlci, 3. to learn.
Divldo, divlsi, divisum, 3. to divide.
Do, dedi, datum, 1. to give.
Abdo, abdidi, abditum, 3. to hide.
Addo \
Condo
Credo
Dedo
Edo
Perdo
Prodo
Reddo
Subdo
Trado
Veado'
-didi,-ditum,3.
/to add.
tofound, hide,
to believe,
to give up.
to give forth,
to lose,
to betray.
to restore,
to substitute,
to deliver.
\tosdl.
Doceo, docui, doctum, 2. to teach.
Doleo, dolui, dolitum, 2. to feel pain.
Domo, domut, dSmltum, 1. to tame.
Duco, duxi, ductum, 3. to lead.
Duresco, durui, 3. to grow hard.
Edo, edi, esum, 3. to eat.
Effloresce, efflorui, 3. to bloom.
Elicio, elicui, elicitum, 3. to entice forth.
Emo, emi, emptum, 3. to buy, take.
Eneco, -cui & -avi, -ctum & -atum, 1. kill.
Eo, -Ivi, -Itum, to go.
Abeo, -ivi and -ii, -Itum, to go atoay.
Adeo, -ivi and -ii, -itum, to go to.
Ante-eo, ante-ivi, to go before.
Circu(m)eo, -ivi, -itum, to go round.
Coeo, ooivi, coitum, to go together.
Exeo, exivi, exitum, to go out.
Ineo, inivi, initum, to go into.
Intereo, -i(v)i, -Itum, to perish.
Obeo, obivi, obitum, to encounter.
Pereo, peri(v)i, peritum, to perish.
Praeeo, -ivi, -itum, to go before
Praetereo, -ivi, -itum, to go by.
Prodeo, -i(v)i, -itum, to go forth.
Redeo, redi(v)i, reditum, to return.
Subeo, subi(v)i,subitum
Transeo, -i(v)i, -itum, to go over.
Exardesco, -arsi, -arsum, 3. to blaze fortli.
Excello, excellui, 3. to (xccl.
Expavesco, expavi, 3. to grow alarmed.
Facesso, -si, -sltum, 3. to accomplish.
Facio, feci, factum, 3. to do, make.
Pallo, fgfelli, falsum, 3. to deceive.
Parcio, farsi, fartum, 4. to stuff.
Faveo, favi, fautum, 2. to favour.
*Fendo, * fendi, * fensurn, 3. to strike.
Fero, inf. ferre, tiili, latum, to bear.
Ferveo and -vo, -bui and -vi, 2, 3. to boil.
Fido, fisus sum, 3. to trust.
Figo, fixi, fixum, 3. to fix.
Findo, fldi, fissum, 3. to cleave.
Fingo, finxi, fictum, 3. to fashion.
Fio, inf. fieri, factus sum, to become.
Flecto, flexi, flexum, 3. to bend.
Fleo, flevi, fletum, 2. to weep.
Ploreo, florui, 2. to flourish.
Fluo, flux', fluxum, 3. to flow.
148
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
Fodio, fodi, fossnm, 3. to dig.
Foveo, fovi, fotum, 2. to cherish.
Frango, fregi, fractum, 3. to break.
Fremo, -ui, -itum, 3. to murmur.
Frendo, fressum & fresum, 3. to gnasli.
Frico, frlcui, frictuin& -aturn, 1. to rub,
Frigeo, 2. to be cold.
Frigo, -xi, -ctum or -sum, 3. to parch.
Fugio, fugi, fugitum, 3. to flee.
Fulcio, f ulsi, fultum, 4. to prop.
Fulgeo, fulsi, 2, to glitter.
Fundo, fudi, fusum, 3. to pour, rout.
Furo, furui, 3. to rage.
Gaudeo, gavlsus sum, 2. to rejoice.
Gemo, gemui, gemltum, 3. to groan.
Gero, gessi, gestum, 3. to carry on.
Gigno, genui, genitum, 3. to produce.
Glubo, 3. to baric, peel.
Hsereo, haesi, hsesum, 2. to stick.
Haurio, hausi, haustum, 4. to drain.
Horresco, horrai, 3. to shudder.
Ico, ici, ictum, 3. to strike.
Ignosco, ignovi, ignotum, 3. to pardon.
Illucesco, illuxi, 3. to grow light.
Imbuo, imbui, imbutum, 3. to tinge.
Incalesco, incalui, 3. to get warm.
Incandesce, incandui, 3. to glow.
Incanesco, incanui, 3. to become white.
Incendo, -cendi, -censum, 3. tosetonfirc
Incesso, -cesslvi, or -cessi, 3. to assail.
Incipio, incepi, inceptum, 3. to begin.
Increbresco, -crebui,3. become frequent
Indulgeo, -ulsi, -ultum, 2. to beindulgeut
Induo, indui, indutum, 3. to put on.
Ingemisco, ingemui, 3. to groan orcr.
Jacio, jeci, jactum, 3. to throw.
Jubeo, jussi, jusaum, 2. to command.
Jungo, junxi, junctum, 3. to join,
Juvo, juvi, jutum, 1. to help.
Labasco, 3. to totter.
Lacesso, -ivi, -itum, 3. to provoke.
Lsedo, Isesi, Isesum, to hurt.
Lambo, Iambi, 3. to lick.
Languesco, langui, 3. to grow languid.
Lateo, latui, 2. to lie hid.
Lavo, lavi, lavatum, lautum,lotum, 1. to
wash.
Lego, legi, lectum, 3. to choose, read.
Lino, levi and. livi, lltum, 3. to smear.
Lingo, linxi, linctnm, 3. to Vck.
Linquo, liqui, * lictum, 3. to leave.
Luceo, luxi, 2. to shine.
Ludo, lusi, lusum, 3. to play.
Lugeo, luxi, 2. to mourn.
Luo, lui, luitum, 3. to wash, atone.
Malo, inf. malle, malui, to prefer.
Mando, mandi, mansum, 3. to chew.
Maneo, mansi, mansum, 2. to rema'n.
Mansuesco,-suevi,-suetum,3.0roM>u?H'>.
Maturesco, maturui, 3. to grow ripe.
Merge, mersi, mersuni, 3. to drown.
Meto, messui, messum, 3. to mow, ep.
Metuo, metui, 2. to fear.
Mico, micui, 1. to glitter.
Minuo, minui, minutum, 3. to lessen.
Misceo, -cui, mistum or mixtum, 2. m ! x.
Mitesco, 3. to grow ripe.
Mitto, misi, missum, 3. to send.
Molo, molui, molitum, 3. to grind.
Mordeo, momordi, morsum, 2. to bite.
Moveo, movi, motum, 2. to move.
Mulceo, mulsi, inulsum, 2. to soothe.
Mulgeo, mulsi, mulsum, 2. to milk.
Necto, -xui and -xi, -sum, 3. to tie, binl.
Negligo, -lexi, -lectum, 3. to neglect.
Neo, nevi, netum, 2. to spin.
Ningo, ninxi, 3. to snow.
No, navi, 1. to s icim.
Nolo, inf. nolle, nolui, to be unwilling.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
149
Noeco, novi, notutn, 3. to be acquainted
with.
Nubo, nupsi, nuptum, 3. to be married.
Obmutesco, obmutui, 3. to become mute.
Obdormisco, -ivi, -itum, 3. to fall asleep.
Obstupesco, -stupui, 3. become amazed.
Occido, occldi, occasum, 3. to fall.
Occido, occldi, occisum, 3. to slay.
Occulo, occului, occultum, 3. to hide.
Offendo, -di, -sum, 3. to knock against.
Operio, operui, opertum, 4. to cover.
Pallesco, pallui, 3. grow pale.
Pando, -di, -sum & passum, 3. to spread.
Pango, pepigi, pactum, 3. to fasten.
Parco, peperci, parsum, 3. to spare.
Pario, peperi, partum, 3. to bring forth.
Pasco, pavi, pastum, 3. to feed.
Patesco, patui, 3. to become open.
Paveo, pavi, 2. to fear.
Pecto, -xi, -xum and -ctltum, 3. to comb.
Pello, pepuli, pulsum, 3. to drive.
Pendeo, pependi, pensum, 2. to hang.
Pendo, pgpendi, pensum, 3. to weigh.
Percello, -culi, -culsum, 3. to dishearten.
Pergo, perrexi, perrectum, 3. to go on.
Peto, petivi, petitum, 3. to ask, seek.
Pingo, pinxi, pictum, 3. to paint.
Pinso, -si and -sui, -sum, 3. to pound.
Plango, planxi, planctum, 3. to beat.
Plaudo, -si, -sum, 3. to clap hands.
Plecto, 3. to punish.
*Pleo, *plevi, *pletum, 2. to fill.
Plico, plicavi and *plicui, *plicatum and
plicitum, 1. to fold.
Pono, posui, positum, 3. to place.
Posco, poposci, 3. to demand.
Possum, inf. posse, potui, to be able.
Poto, -avi, -atum and potum, 1. to drink.
Praecello, prsecellui, 3. to cxc .1.
Prandeo, prandi, pransum, 2. to dine.
Prehendo, -di, -sum, 3. to grasp.
Premo, pressi, pressum, 3. to press.
Promo, -mpsi, -mptum, 3. to take forth.
Psallo, psalli, 3. to play on harp.
Pungo, pupugi, punctum, 3. to prick.
Qusero, qusesivi, quaesitum, 3. to seek.
Quatio, quassi, quassum, 3. to shake.
Queo, quivi, quitum, to be able.
Quiesco, quievi, quietum, 3. to rest,
Rapio, rapui, raptum, 3. to seize.
Rado, rasi, rasum, 3. to scrape.
Rego, rexi, rectum, 3. to rule.
Reperio, -pperi, -pertum, 4. to discover.
Repo, repsi, reptum, 3. to creep.
Revivisco, revixi, 3. to come to life again.
Rideo, risi, risum, 2. to laugh.
Rodo, rosi, rosum, 3. to gnaw.
Rubesco, rubui, 3. to become red.
Rudo, -di and -ivi, -itum, 3. to bray.
Rumpo, rupi, ruptum, 3. to break.
Ruo, rui, rutum, 3. to rush, fall.
Saepio (sepio), -si, -turn, 4. to hedg in.
Salio, salui, saltum, 4. to leap.
Sancio, sanxi, sanctum, 4. to consecrate.
Sapio, sapi(v)i, 3. to taste of, be wise.
Sarcio, sarsi, sartum, 4. to mend.
Scabo, scabi, 3. to scratch.
Scalpo, scalpsi, scalptum, 3. to scratch.
Scando, scandi, scansum, 3. to climb.
Scindo, scldi, scissum, 3. to tear.
Scisco, scivi, scitum, 3. to decree.
Scribo, scripsi, scriptum, 3. to write.
Sculpo, sculpsi, sculptum, 3. to engrave.
Seco, secui, sectum, 1. to cut.
Sedeo, sedi, sessum, 2. to sit.
Sentio, sensi, sensum, 4, to feel.
Sepelio, sepelivi, sepultum, 3. to bury.
150
NEW EASY LATIN PEIMEfi.
Sero, serui, sertum, 3. to join.
Sero, sevi, eatum, 3. to sow.
Serpo, serpsi, serptum, 3. to crawl.
Sido, sidi, 3. to sit down.
Sileo, silui, 2. to be silent.
Singultlo, 4. to sob.
Sino, sivi, sltum, 3. to allow.
*Sisto, *stiti,*statura, 3. tomato tostancl.
Sitio, siti(v)i, 4. to be thirsty.
Soleo, solitus sum, 2. to be icont.
Solvo, solvi, solutum, 3. to loosen.
Sono, eonni, sonitum, 1. to sound.
Sorbeo, -bui, 2. to suck up.
Spargo, sparsi, sparsum, 3. to sprinkle.
* Specie, *spexi, *spectum, 3, to espy.
Sperno, sprevi, spretum, 3. to despise.
Spondeo,spopondi, sponsum, 2.topledge.
Statuo, Btatui, statutum, 3. to set up.
Sterno, stravi, stratum, 3. to strew.
Sterto, stertui, 3. to snore.
*Stinguo,*stinxi,*stinctum, 2. to quench.
Sto, stSti, statum, 1. to stand.
Strepo, strepui, strepitum, 3. to roar.
Strideo, stridi, 2. to shriek.
Stringo, strinxi, strictum, 3. to tie.
Struo, struxi, structum, 3. to pile.
Suadeo, suasi, suasum, 2. to advise.
Suesco, suevi, suetum, 3. to be wont.
Sugo, suxi, snctum, 3. to swcfc.
Sum, inf. esse, perf. fui, to be.
Absum, -esse, -fui & afui, be absent.
Adsum, -esse, -affui, to be present.
Desum, -esse, -fui, to be wanting.
Insum, -esse, -fui, to be in.
Intersum, -esse, -fui, to be among.
Obsum, -esse, -fui, to be in the way of.
Praesum, -esse, -fui, to be before.
Prosum, prodesse, profui, to be useful.
Subsum, subesse, to be under.
Supersum,-esse, -fui,to be over, remain.
Sumo, sumpsi, sumptum, 3, to take.
Suo, sui, sutum, 3. to sew.
Surgo, surrexi, surrectum, 3. to arise.
Tango, tetigi, tactum, 3. to touch.
Tego, texi, tectum, 3. to cover.
Temno, tempsi, temptum, 3. to despise.
Tendo, tetendi, -sum & -turn, 3. to stretch.
Teneo, tenui, tentum, 2. to hold.
Tepesco, tepui, 3. to become warm.
Tero, trivi, tritum, 3. to rub.
Tergo, tersi, tersum, 3. to wipe.
Texo, texui, textum, 3. to weave.
Timeo, timui, 2. to fear.
Tinguo, tinxi, tinctum, 3. to dye.
Tollo, sustuli, sublatum, 3. to tt<lce up.
Tondeo, totondi, tonsum, 2. to shear.
Tono, tonui, tonitum, 1. to thunder.
Torqueo, torsi, tortum, 2. to twist.
Torreo, torrui, tostmn, 2. to roast.
Traho, traxi, tractum, 3. to draw.
Tremo, tremui, 3. to tremble.
Tribuo, tribui, tributtun, 3. to assign.
Trudo, trusi, trusum, 3. to thrust.
Tundo, tutudi, tunsum, 3. to thump.
Turgeo, tursi, 2. to swell.
Unguo, unxi, unctum, 3. to anoint.
Urgeo, ursi, 2. to press.
Uro, ussi, ustum, 3. to burn.
Vado, *vasi, *vasum, 3. to go.
Veho, vexi, vectum, 3. to carry.
Velio, vulsi (velli), vulsum, 3. to pluck.
Veneo, venivi and venii, v-enitum, 4. to
be on sale.
Venio, veni, ventum, 4. to come.
Vergo, versi, 3. to bend.
Verro, verri, versum, 3. to sweep.
Verto, verti, versum, 3. to turn.
Veto, vetui, vetitum, 1. to forbid.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
151
Video, vidi, visum, 2. to see.
Vincio, vinxi, vinctum, 4. to bind.
Vinco, vici, victum, 3. to conquer.
Viso, visi, 3. to visit.
Vivo, vixi, victum, 3. to live.
Volo, inf. velle, volui, to wish.
Volvo, volvi, volutum, 3. to roll.
Vomo, vomui, vomitum, 3. to vomit.
Voveo, vovi, votum, 2. to vow.
IRREGULAR DEPONENTS.
Ajnplector, ampleciti, amplexus sum, to
embrace.
Apiscor, apisci, aptus sum, to obtain.
Assentior, -tiri, assensus sum, to agree to.
Comminiscor, -ci, -mentus sum.to devise.
Expergiscor, -ci, experrectus sum, to
wake up.
Experior, experiri, expertus sum, to try.
Fatear, fateri, fassus sum, to confess.
Fatiscor, -ci, feseus sum, to grow weary.
Fruor, frui, fruitus sum, to enjoy.
Fungor, -gi, functus sum, to discharge.
Gradior, gradi, gressus sum, to step.
Irascor, irasci, iratus sum, to be angry.
Labor, labi, lapsus sum, to glide.
Loquor, loqui, locutus stun, to speak.
Medeor, mederi, to heal.
Metior, metiri, mensus sum, to measure.
Morior, mori, mortuus sum, to die.
Nanciscor, -ci, nactus sum, to obtain.
Nascor, nasci, natus sum, to be born.
Nitor, niti, nisua & nixus sum, strive.
Obliviscor, -ci, oblitus sum, to forget.
Opperior, -iri, oppertus sum, to wait for.
Ordior, ordiri, orsus sum, to begin.
Orior, oriri, ortus sum, to rise.
Paciscor, -ci, pactus sum, to bargain.
Patior, pati, passus sum, to suffer.
Proficiscor, -ci, profectus sum, to set out.
Queror, -i, questus sum, to complain.
Reor, reri, ratus sum, to think.
Sequor, sequi, secutus sum, to follow.
Ulciscor, ulcisci, ultus sum, to avenge.
Utor, uti, usus sum, to use.
END OF PART III-
PART IV. DIFFICILIORA.
153
PART IV. DIFFICILIORA.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
1. Gender of the Substan-
tive. General Eules . . 157
2. Gender of the Third De-
clension :
(1) First General Eule . 159
(2) ' Second General Eule 159
(3) Third General Eule . 159
(4) Masc. Substantives . 160
(5) Feminine . 161
(6) Neuter .163
3. Epitome 164
4. Alphabetical List of Sub-
stantives, irregular as to
their Gender :
(1) Masculine .... 165
(2) Feminine .... 166
(3) Neuter 166
(4) Common .... 167
5. Peculiarities of the Sub-
stantive General . . 168
PAGE
6. Peculiarities of the Sub-
stantive :
(1) First Declension . . 171
(2) Second Declension . 171
(3) Third Declension . 172
(a) Accusative Sing. 173
(I) Abl. Sing, in i .173
(c) Abl. Sing, i and e 174
(d) Genitive Plural . 175
(4) Fourth Declension . 176
(5) Fifth Declension . . 176
7. Declension of Proper Names 177
8. Peculiarities of the Sub-
stantive (alphabetically
arranged) 178
9. Eoman Calendar . . . 184
10. Eoman Money .... 186
11. Parsing 188
12. Order of Latin Words . . 190
13. Eules of Syntax . . 192-206
155
PART IV. DIFFICILIORA.
GENDER OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
In giving in full the Gender of the Substantive, page 18, Part I., is
repeated, to make each Part complete in itself.
THERE are three Genders; a Substantive must be either
(a) Masculine, (&) Feminine, (c) Neuter. Some also are
Common, i.e. Masculine or Feminine.
We give two common General Rules :
I. Certain classes of things are of certain Genders.
Masculine. Males. People. Mountains (most).
Months. Winds. Rivers (most).
Feminine. Females. Countries (most).
Islands. Cities and Trees (most) .
Neuter. Indeclinable Nouns ; as, fas, nefas, nihil.
Common. Words applicable to either sex ; as,
Conjux, husband or wife.
Hostis, an enemy.
II. Genders of Substantives are in a general way also
known by the terminations in each Declension.
First. Feminine, in a and e ; Masculine in as and es.
Second. Masculine, in us and er ; Neuter in um.
Third. (a) Masculine terminations : o, or, os, er, es, increasing in
gen., ex (not 03).
(b) Feminine terminations : is, as, aus, x (not ea?), s pre-
ceded by a consonant, es not increasing in genitive.
(c) Neuter terminations : ar, ur, us, c, a, t, I, e, n.
Fourth. Masculine in its ; Neuter in u.
Fifth. Feminine.
But to these rules there are many exceptions (see pp. 158-
167).
137
158 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
GENDER OF THE SUBSTANTIVE,
EXCEPTIONS.
DECLENSION I.
Nouns in a denoting Males, are Masculine ; as, poeta, a poet.
So also are
Hadria, Adriatic Sea. Scurra, a buffoon.
DECLENSION II.
A few in us are Feminine :
Alvus, the belly. Humus, the ground.
Arctus, the Bear (constellation). Pampinus, vine-leaf.
C&Tlo&sTis, fine flax. Pirus, a pear-tree, (a)
Colus, a distaff. Sapphirus., a sapphire. (&)
Vannus, a winnowing fan.
A few in us are Neuter :
Pelagus, the sea. Yulgus, the common people
Virus, poison. (generally).
DECLENSION III.
Exceptions are numerous (see pp. 158-167).
DECLENSION IV.
A few in us are Feminine :
Acus, a needle. Manus, the hand.
Anus, an old woman. Nurus, a daughter-in-law.
Donius, a house. Porticus, a portico.
Idus (pi.), the Ides. Socrus, a mother-in-law.
Tribus, a tribe.
DECLENSION V.
All are Feminine except dies, which is common in the Singular, but Mascu-
line in the Plural, and meridies, midday, which is Masculine.
(a) And names of plants.
(b) And names of jewels.
GENDER OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 159
GENDER OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Words of the Third Declension are of various terminations
and of all genders.
Some of course may be known by their meanings; as,
Pater, a father, )
Tiberis, the Tiber, j are masculine.
Mulier, a woman, -\
Soror, a sister, C are feminine.
Venus, the goddess Venus, j
But, as a rule, the gender in each declension must be
decided by the termination.
FIRST GENERAL RULE.
Substantives are masculine which end in o, or, os, er, es
increasing in Genitive, ex (not x).
o, leo, a lion. er, anser, a goose.
or, dolor, pain. es, pes, a foot,
os, flos, a flower. ex, grex, a flock.
SECOND GENERAL RULE.
Substantives are feminine which end in is, as, aus, x
(not ex), s preceded by a consonant, es not increasing in Gen.
is, navis, a ship. x, pax, peace,
as, libertas, liberty. bs, urbs, a city,
am, laus, praise. es, nubes, a cloud.
THIRD GENERAL RULE.
Substantives in ar, ur, us, c, a, t, I, e, n (catlen) are neuter.
ar, calcar, a spur. a, poema, a poem,
ur, fulgur, lightning. t, caput, the head,
us, corpus, a body. I, animal, an animal,
c, lac, milk. e, mare, the sea.
n, nomen, a name.
But there are many exceptions.
160
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
I. MASCULINE.
Substantives in o, or, os, er, es increasing, ex (not x) are
masculine.
1. But though Substantives
ending in o are masculine,
Ador adSris spelt
^Equor sequoris the sea
Cor cordis the heart
those ending in do, go, io are
Marmor -oris marble
feminine, and so are
Caro carnis flesh
3. Those ending in os are
Echo echus an echo
masc., but two are/emwme :
Cos cotis a whetstone
The following however,
Dos dotis a dowry
though they end in do, go, io,
are masculine :
And two are neuter :
Os ossis a bone
Cardo cardinis a hinge
Os oris the mouth
Ordo ordinis a row
Prsedo prsedonis a pirate
4. Those ending in er are
(a grappling
Harpago -onis | ^
Ligo ligonia a spade
masculine ; but linter, lintris,
a wherry, is feminine, and
thirteen are neuter :
Curculio -onis a weevil.
Acer aceris the maple
Papilio -onis a butterfly
Cadaver -eris a corpse
Pugio -onis a dagger
Cicer ciceris the chickpea
Scipio -onis a staff
Iter itineris a journey
Septentrio -onis the North
Papaver -eris the poppy
Stellio -onis a lizard
Piper -eris pepper
Unio -onis a pearl
Siler sileris an osier
Vespertilio -onis a bat
Suber suberis the corlc tree
Tuber tuberis a swelling
And one in go is common :
Uber uberis an udder
Margo marginis a border
Ver veris the spring
Verber -beris a whip
2. Those ending in or are
Zingiber -eris ginger
masculine ; but arbor, arboris,
N.B. The penultimate in the Genitive
a tree, is feminine, and four
are neuter.
Case of words in previous list is short,
so they are not marked; except ver, veris,
spring.
SUBSTANTIVES.
161
5. Those ending in es in-
6. Those ending in ex are
creasing in the Genitive Case
inasc. t but six are feminine :
are masculine, but seven are
Carex caricis a kind of rush
feminine.
Faex faecis sediment
Compes compgdis a fetter
Forfex forficis a pair of shears
Lex legis a law
Merces mercedis wages
Merges mergitis a sheaf of corn
Quies quietis rest
Nex ne"cis a violent death
Supellex -leetilis furniture
Requies requietis rest
Seges segetis standing corn
Teges teggtis a mat
And ten are common :
Artifex artificis an artificer
And one in CBS is neuter :
Imbrex imbricis a hollow tile
Index indicis an informer
68 seris copper (money)
Judex judicis a judge
Obex obicis a bolt
And three are common :
Opifex opificis a workman
Pumex pumicis pumice stone
Ales alibis a bird
Rumex rumicis sorrel
Conies comitis a companion
Silex silicis a flint
Heres heredis an heir or heiress
Vindex vindicis an avenger
II. FEMININE.
Substantives are feminine which end in is, as, aus, x, s pre-
ceded by a consonant, es not increasing.
1. Those ending in is are Fascis
-is a bundle
O
fern., but many are masculine.
Follis
Fustis
-is a pair of b ello ws
-is a cudgel
Glis
gliris a dormouse
Amnis -is a river
Ignis
ignis fire
Annalis -is a year-book
Lapis
lapidis a stone
Axis -is an axle
Mensis
-is a month
Canalis -is a canal
Mugilis
-is a mullet
Casses -ium (pi.) a snare
Natalis
-is a birthday
Caulis -is a stalk
Orbis
-is a circle
Clunis -is a buttock
Panis
-is bread
Collis -is a hill
Piscis
-is a fish
Crinis -is hair
Postis
-is a door-post
Cucumis -is (ens) a cucumber
Pulvis
-Sris dust
Ensis -is a sword
(see over)
162
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
Sanguis -guinis Hood
5. Those ending in s pre-
Torris -is afire-brand
Unguis -is finger or toe-nail
Yecfcis -is a lever
ceded by a consonant are
feminine, but thirteen are
Vermis -is a worm
masculine :
Vomis (er) -Sris a ploughshare
For those sometimes fern., see
Bidens bidentis a hoe
those with an asterisk, pp. 165, 166.
Chalybs chalybis steel
Dens dentis a tooth
2. Those ending in as are
fern., but six are masculine :
Fons f ontis a fountain
Gryps gryphis a griffin
Hydrops hydropis dropsy
Mons mentis a mountain
Adamas -antis a diamond
Occideus occidentis the West
As assis a Roman coin
Oriens orientis the East
Elephas -antis an elephant
Pons pontis a bridge
Gigas -antis a giant
Rudens rudentis a cable
Mas maris a male
Tridens tridentis a trident
Vas vadis a surety
Triens trientis a third pat t
And one is neuter:
And seven are common :
Yas vasis a vessel.
Adeps adipis fat
3. Those ending in aus are
feminine, and there are no
Adolescens -entis a youth
Infans infantis an infant
Municeps municipis a burgess
exceptions.
Parens parentis a parent
Princeps principis a chief
4. Those ending in x are
Serpens -entis a serpent
fern., bat three in ix are mas-
culine :
6. Those ending in es not
Calix calicis a cup
increasing are feminine, but
Fornix f ornicis an arch
two are masculine :
Phoenix phoenicis the phcenix
Acinaces -is a scimitar
And two in ux are common :
Verres -is a boar-pig
Conjux conjugis a husband or wife
Dux ducis a guide
And one is common :
Note those in ex on p. 161.
Vates vatis a seer
SUBSTANTIVES.
163
III. NEUTER.
Substantives in ar, ur, us, c, a, t, I, e, n, are neuter.
1. Substantives ending in
4. Those ending in c, a, t,
ar are neuter, but one is
and e are neuter, and there
masculine :
are no exceptions.
Lar laris household deity
2. Those ending in ur are
5. Those ending in I are
neuter, but four are mascu-
neuter, but five are mascu-
line :
line :
Fur furis a> thief
Furfur furfuris bran
Consul consulis a consul
Turtur turturis a turtle dove
Mugil mugilis a mullet
Vultur vulturis a vulture
Pugil pugilis a boxer
Sal salis salt
3. Those ending in us are
Sol solis the sun
neuter, but two are masculine :
Lepus leporis a hare
6. Those ending in n are
Mus muris a mouse
neuter, but eight are mascu-
Nine are feminine :
line :
Incus incudis an anvil
Attagen attagenis a heathcoclc
Juventus juventutis youth
Palus paludis a marsh
Delphin delphiuis a dolphin
Fidicen -inis a lute-player
Pecus pecudis cattle
Lien lienis the spleen
Salus salutis safety
Pecten pectinis a comb
Senectus senectutis old age
Eenes renum (pi.) the kidneys
Servitus servitutis slavery
Tellus telluris the earth
Splen splenis the spleen
Tibicen -Inis afiute-player
Virtus virtutis virtue
Three in on are feminine :
And two are common :
Gorgon Gorgonis Gorgon
Grus gruris a crane
Halcyon halcySnis a kingfisher
Sus suis a swine
Sindon eindSnis fine linen
164
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
EPITOME.
As a rale the genders must be decided by the terminations,
as follows, but there are many exceptions.
Masculine : o, or, os, er, es increasing, ex (not x).
Feminine ; is, as, aus, x, s preceded by a consonant, es not increasing.
Neuter : ar, ur, us, c, a, t, 1, e, n (catlen).
MASCULINE.
1. Words ending in o : but those in do, go, io are feminine, three in
do, two in go, eight in io are however masculine ; and one in go is common.
MASCULINE.
2. Words ending in or.
But one is feminine,
And four are neuter.
3. Words ending in os.
But two are feminine,
And two are neuter.
4. Words ending in er.
But one is feminine,
And thirteen are neuter.
5. Words ending in es, increasing.
But seven are feminine,
And one is neuter.
And three are common.
6. Words in ex (not x).
But six are feminine,
And ten are common.
FEMININE.
1. Words ending in is.
But many are masculine
2. Words ending in as.
But six are masculine,
And one is neuter.
3. Words ending in aus.
4. Words ending in x.
But three in ix are masculine,
And two in ux are common.
Note words in ex (opposite column).
5. Words in s after a consonant.
But thirteen are masculine,
And seven are common.
6. Words in es not increasing.
But two are masculine.
And one is common.
1. Words ending in ar.
But one is masculine.
2. Words ending in ur.
But four are masculine.
3. Words ending in MS.
But two are masculine,
And nine are feminine,
And two are common.
NEUTEE.
4. Words in c, a, t, e.
There are no exceptions.
5. Words ending in I.
But five are masculine.
6. Words ending in n.
But eight are masculine,
And three (in on) are feminine.
SUBSTANTIVES IRREGULAR.
165
SUBSTANTIVES IRREGULAR IN GENDER.
(Alphabetically arranged.)
MASCULINE.
Acinaces
acinacis
scimitar
Gryps
gryphis
a griffin
Adamas
adamantis
adamant
fa qrawplii
Harpago
harpagonis
J y J/Jr
Amnis
amnis
a river
{ hook
Annalis
annalis
a year-book
Hydrops
hydropis
dropsy
As
assis
a Roman coin
Ignis
ignis
fire
Attagen
attagenis
a heathcock
Lapis
lapidis
a stone
Axis
axis
an axle
Lepus
leporis
a hare
Bidens
bidentis
a hoe
Lien
lienis
spleen
Ligo
ligonis
a spade
Calix
calicis
a cup
*Callis
callis
a path
Mas
maris
a male
Canalis
Cardo
canalis
cardinis
a canal
a hinge
Mensis
Mons
mensis
mentis
a month
a mountain
Casses
Caulis
cassium
caulis
a net
a stalk
Mugil (-is)
Mus
mugilis
muris
a mullet
a mouse
Chalybs
chalybis
steel
Natalia
natalis
a birthday
*Cinis
cineris
ashes
Occidens
occidentis
the West
Clunis
-is
a buttock
Orbis
orbis
a circle
Collis
collis
a hill
Ordo
ordinis
a row
Consul
consulis
a consul
Oriens
orientis
the East
Crinis
crinis
hair
Cuciimis
-cumeris
a cucumber
Panis
panis
bread
Curculio
-culionis
a weevil
Papilio
papilionis
a butterfly
Delphin
Dens
delpbinis
dentis
a dolphin
a tooth
Pecten
Phoenix
pectmis
phoanicis
a comb
the phoenix
Elephas
Ensis
-phantis
ensis
an elephant
a sword
Piscis
Pons
piscis
pontis
a fish
a bridge
Fascis
fascis
a bundle
Postis
postis
a door-post
*Finis
finis
an end
Prado
prsedonis
a pirate
Follis
follis |
a pair of
bellows
Pugil
Pugio
pugilis
pugionis
a boxer
a dagger
Fons
fontis
a fountain
Pulvis
pulveris
dust
Fornix
*Funis
Fur
Furfur
Fustis
fornicis
funis
furis
furfiiris
fustis
an arch
a rope
a thief
bran
a cudgel
Eenes
Eudens
Sal
Sanguis
Scipio
renum
rudentis
salis
sanguinis
scipionis
the kidneys
a cable
salt
blood
a staff
Gigas
gigantis
a giant
*Sentis
sentis
a bramble
Glis
gliris
a dormouse
Septentrio
-trionis
the North
166
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
Sol
solis
the sun
Unio
unionis
a pearl
Splen
splenis
spleen
Vas
vadis
a surety
Stellio
stellionis
a lizard
Vectis
vectis
a lever
*Torquis
torquis
a necklace
Vermis
vermis
a worm
Torris
torris
afire-brand
Verres
verris
a boar-pig
Tridens
tridentis
a trident
Vespertilio
lionis
a bat
Triens
trientis
a third part
Vomis (er)
vomeris
a ploughshare
Turtur
turturis
a turtle dove
Vultur
vulturis
a vulture
Unguis
unguis
the nail
A fe\v words in is in this list marked * are sometimes feminine (see p. 162).
FEMININE.
Arbor
arboris
a tree
Linter
lintris
a wherry
Carex
caricia
a kind of rush
Merces
mercedis
wages
Caro
carnis
flesh
Merges
mergitis
a sheaf of corn
Cornpes
compedis
a fetter
Nex
necis
a violent death
Cos
cotis
a whetstone
Palus
paludis
a marsh
Dos
dotis
a dowry
Pecus
pecudis
cattle
Echo
echus
an echo
Quies
quietis
rest
Faex
faecis
sediment
Requies
requietis
rest
Forfex
forficis
(a pair of
Salus
salutis
safety
Gorgon
Gorgonis
\ SflCCLTS
Gorgon
Seges
Senectus
segetis
-tutis
standing corn
old age
Halcyon
halcyonis
a kingfisher
Servitus
-tutis
slavery
Ilex
ilicis
the holm-oak
Sindon
sindonis
fine linen
Incus
incudis
an anvil
Supellex
-lectilis
furniture
Inquies
inquietis
restlessness
Teges
tegetis
a mat
Juventus
juventutis youth
Tellus
telluris
the earth
Lex
legis
a law
Virtus
virtutis
virtue
NEUTER.
Acer
aceris
the maple
Papaver
papaveris
the poppy
Ador
adoris
spelt
Piper
pipgris
pepper
JEquor
eequoris
the sea
Siler
sileris
an osier
JEs
seris
copper
Suber
suberis
a cork tree
Cadaver
cadaveris
a corpse
Tuber
tuberis
a swelling
Cicer
ciceris
the chickpea
Uber
uberis
an udder
Cor
cordis
the heart
Vas
vasis
a vessel
Iter
itineris
a journey
Ver
veris
spring
Marmor
marmoris marble
Verber
verbgris
a whip
Os
oris
the mouth
Zingiber
zmgiberis
ginger
Os
ossis
a bone
SUBSTANTIVES IRREGULAR.
167
COMMON.
Adepg
adipis
fat
Index
indicia
an informer
Adolescens -entis
a youth
Infans
infantis
an infant
Advena
-V6D89
a stranger
Interpres
pretis
an interpreter
Ales
alitis
a bird
Judex
judicis
a judge
Anguis
anguis
a snake
Margo
marginis
a border
Artifex
artificis
an artificer
Municeps
municipis
a burgess
Auctor
auctoris
an author
Obex
obicis
a bolt
Bos
bovis
an ox
Obses
obsidis
a hostage
Opifex
opificis
a workman
Canis
canis
a dog
Civis
civis
a citizen
Parens
parentis
a parent
Cliens
clientis
a client
Pollis
pollinis
fine flour
Comes
comitia
a companion
Princeps
principis
a chief
Conjux
conjugis
( a husband or
I wife
Pumex
pumicis
( pumice
\ stone
Con viva
convivse
a guest
Rumex
rumicis
sorrel
Gustos
custodis
a guardian
Sacerdos
, ,. la priest or
sacerdotisj 7^
Dama
Dux
damse
duels
a deer
a guide
Serpens
Silex
serpentis
silicis
a serpent
a flint
Bxul
exulis
an exile
Sus
suis
a swine
Grus
gruis
a crane
Heres
heredis
Can heir or
C heiress
Talpa
Testis
talpse
testis
a mole
a witness
Hostis
hostis
an enemy
Tigris
tigridis
a tiger
Imbrex
imbricis
a hollow tile
Vates
vatis
a seer
Incola
incoljB
an inhabitant
Vindex
vindicis
an avenger
The
following
five are rarely found masculine :
Dama
damae
a deer Sus
suis
a swine
Grus
gruis
a crane
Talpa
talpse
a mole
Tigris tigridis a tiger
The following six, though common, are rarely found feminine :
Augur auguris an augur
Auriga aurigse a cJiarioteer
Hospes hospitis a guest
Hostis hostis an enemy
Miles militis a soldier
Prseses prsesidis a guardian
168 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PECULIARITIES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
There are many irregularities in the Substantive which
require notice.
1. Some Substantives are not declined ; as,
fas. nefas. nihil. instar.
2. Some Substantives are used in the Singular number only.
Argentum, silver. JEvum, age.
Aurum, gold. Letum, death.
Ferrum, iron. Sanguis, blood.
Plebs, the common people. Pueritia, boyhood.
3usiitia, justice. *Aer, air.
Ver, the spring. ^Ether, the sky.
With many more.
* A Plural occurs in Lucretius.
3. Some are used in the Plural number only.
Manes, ghosts. Nugse, trifles.
Liberi, children. Grates, thanks.
Penates, household gods. Arma, arms.
Divitise, riches. Munia, funct ions (office).
Cunae, a cradle. Magalia, huts.
With many more.
4. Some Substantives want one or more cases.
The following have no Nom. ; viz. :
(daps) dapis (f.) a feast.
(ditio) ditionis (f.) a dominion.
(frux) frugis (f.) fruit.
(ops) opis (f.) strength.
and others.
5. Some take two forms, though of the same declension, as
Jocus, a jest; plur., joci and joca.
Locus, a place; plur., loci, loca.
Frenum, a bit; plur., freni, frena.
Eastrum, a harrow ; plur., rastri, rastra.
PECULIARITIES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 169
6. Some Substantives have a twofold declension, and so
are called Heteroclita ; e.g. domus, a house.
7. In the second declension some Substantives end in us
and um ; as
Callus, callum, hardened, skin.
Commentarius, commentarium, a, note book.
8. Some fluctuate between the first and second declension ;
as
Menda, mendurn, a fault.
Vespera, vesper, the evening.
9. Some fluctuate between the first and fifth ; as
Barbaria, barbarieg, barbarism.
Luxuria, luxuries, luxury.
Materia, materies, matter.
Mollitia, mollities, softness.
10. Some fluctuate between the second and third ; as
Delphitms, -i, and delphin, delphinis, a dolphin.
Elephantus, -i, and elephas, elephantis, an elephant.
Tergum, -i, and tergus, tergeris, a back.
11. Some fluctuate between the second and fourth; as
Cupressus,
us,
and -i, a cypress.
Domus
domus,
and domi, a house.
Ficus,
ficus,
and fici, a fig tree.
Laurus,
laurus,
and lauri, a bay tree.
Pinus,
pinus,
and pini, a pine tree.
Eventus (4),
eventum (2),
an occurrence.
Suggestus (4), suggestum (2), a platform for speakers.
12. Some fluctuate between the third and fifth ; as
Plebs, plebis ; as also plebes, plebis ; as also plebes, plebei, and plebi,
common people.
M
170 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
13. Some vary their declension in the two numbers :
Juge'rum, an acre; Sing., second declension ; Plural, third.
Vas, vasis, a vessel; Sing., third declension j Plural, second.
14. Some Substantives have a different meaning in the
Singular and the Plural.
JEdes, a temple.
Aqua, water.
Auxilium, help.
Career, a prison.
Castrum, a fort.
Copia, plenty.
Gratia, favour.
Impedimentum, a hindrance.
Littera, a letter (alphabet).
Ludus, play, school.
Opera, exertion.
Opis (Gen.), help.
Eostrum, a beak.
Tabula, a board.
P. JEdes, a house.
Aquae, medicinal springs.
Auxilia, auxiliary forces.
Carceres, a starting place.
Castra, a camp.
Copise, forces.
Gratiae, thanks.
Impedimenta, baggage.
Litterse, an epistle.
Ludi, public games.
Operse, workmen.
Opes, power, wealth.
Rostra, a platform for speakers.
Tabulse, writing tablets.
With others.
15. Many have only certain cases ; but these will be given
elsewhere.
16. The following have a full plural, but only the ablative
in the singular:
Ambage (f.), a circuit.
Casse (m.), a snare.
Fauce (.), the throat.
Verbere (n.), a stripe.
With others.
Verlere has also, according to Ovid, a Gen. : verberis.
PECULIARITIES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
171
FIRST DECLENSION".
1.
The Dative and Ablative
of some words end in abus.
Dea, a goddess, deabus.
Filia, a daughter, filiabus.
Nata, a daughter, natabus.
And others.
2.
The two following words
have Gen. Plnr. in um.
Coelicola, a dwelling in heaven,
ccelicolum.
Terrigena, earth-born, terrigenum.
3.
Two words have old
Genitive in as remaining,
Paterfamilias, master of a family.
Materfamilias, mother of a family.
4.
Voc., .Enea.
Ace., ./Eneam or j-Enean.
Greek Substantives in e and es are
given on p. 177.
SECOND DECLENSION.
1.
Deus, a god, is irregular;
p. 177.
2.
Films, a son, makes
Voc., fili (mi fili, my son).
Gen., filii or fili.
And proper names in ius are
\\kefilius; as, Lcelius, Lceli;
so is also genius.
3.
> a cf
4.
Pelagus, the sea.
Virus, poison.
Vulgus, t/i common people. } B p,
5.
;, Nom.P.carbasa,
Tartarus, Tartarus, Tartara.
6.
Adulter, an adulterer.
Armiger, an armour- v
bearer.
Gener, a son-in-law.
Liber, Bacchus.
Liberi, children.
Puer, a boy.
Signifer, a sign-bearer.
Socer, a father-in-law.
Vesper, evening.
7.
Faber, a smith, Gen. Plur., fabro-
rum and fabrum.
Nummus, money, Gen. P., nummuni
and nummorum.
For Greek Substantives, Delos, Orphans, see p.177.
172 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THIRD DECLENSION.
(With Adjectives^)
1 . The terminations of the Substantives of this declension are
many and various. Some grammars give at full length
as many as thirty samples ; but this adds considerably
to -what a boy thinks he has to learn. Three, or at most
four, as samples, are quite sufficient.
Nubes, because it does not increase.
Lapis, because it does increase.
Opus, because it is neuter.
Mare, because it makes ia in the Plural.
2. But it must be well noted that the Genitive Singular must
be known, and then nearly every Substantive, whatever
its termination, can be gone through regularly.
3. Some Substantives have more syllables in the Genitive
than they have in the Nominative, hence they are called
increasing, the proper word being imparisyllabic (not
equal in syllables), as those which do not increase are
called parisyllabic (equal in syllables).
4. There is generally with learners a difficulty as to the
Genitive Plural, whether it ends in um or ium. But the
general rule is,
The Genitive Plural of increasing
nouns is um and not ium.
In other words, if the word increases in the Genitive
Singular it does not further increase in the Genitive
Plural; but there are exceptions, which will be given
presently.
There are peculiarities also in the Ace. and Abl. Singular.
PECULIARITIES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
THIRD DECLENSION.
ACCUSATIVE AND ABLATIVE SINGULAE.
173
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
ABLATIVE SINGULAR IN i.
The Accusative Singular is
The Ablative singular has I
im not em
not e
1. In the five words
1. In all words where the
Amussis a rule
Ace. is im only : as siti,
(Eavis) ravim hoarseness
Tiberi.
Sitis thirst
Tussis a cough
Vis violence
2. In Neuter nouns that end
in e, al, ar, as
2. And in the names of towns
N. Mare Abl. Mari
and rivers in is ; as
Animal Animali
Calcar Calcari
Hispalis Seville
Tiberis the Tiber
3. Substantives in ar the
Gen. of which is not
The Accusative Singular is
dris (a long) have e in
im or em in the nine
the Ablative ; as
words
Baccar baccaris a sweet herb
Clavis a ~key
Far f arris spelt
Febris fever
Jubar jubaris a sunbeam
Messis a harvest
Nectar nectaris nectar
Navis a ship
Pelvis a basin
Puppis the stern of a ship
4. Adjectives ending in is t e;
Eestis a rope
er, is, e : as
Securis an axe
Turris a tower
Tristis sad tristi
and others.
Acer sharp acri
v4 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THIRD DECLENSION.
ABLATIVE SINGULAR IN i AND E.
The Ablative Singular has both i and e,
1. In most words where the Accusa-
tive is im and em ; as, puppi and
puppe.
Kestis, a, rope, has only reste.
Securis, an axe, has only securi.
2. In Adjectives which have in
Nominative one termination ;
Avis a bird
j . - and in Comparatives ; as
Also in
Imber rain
Supellex household utensils
Prudens prudent ti and te
Altior higher ri and re
But the following Adjectives have e only.
Ccflebs
Compos
Deses
Impos
Pauper
Princeps
Pubes
Superstes
ccelibis
compotis
desidis
impotis
pauperis
principis
puberis
superstitis
unmarried
master of
lazy
not master of
poor
chief
adult
surviving
Memor, mindful, has only i. The Participles in ns generally have
rhen used as Epithets, but otherwise e.
NEUTER PLURAL IN IA.
The Nom., Voc., Ace. Plural of Neuter Nouns have ia.
1. In Substantives the Nom. Sing, of which ends in e, al, ar (Gen. am)
as
Mare the sea maria
Animal an animal animalia
Calcar a spur calcaria
2. In Adjectives which have the Abl. Sing, in i alone, or in i and e, except
Comparatives ; as
gravis, gravia ; prudens, prudentia.
But
melior, melioraj altior, altiora, etc.
PECULIARITIES OP THE SUBSTANTIVE. 175
THIRD DECLENSION.
GENITIVE PLUEAL.
The general rule, as before stated, is that words that do not
increase in Gen. Sing, do increase in Gen. Plural, and have
ium ; if they do increase in Gen. Sing., they do not further
increase in Gen. Plural, and have only urn; as,
But,
But there are exceptions.
1. The following six and others, though they do not increase in the Gen.
Sing., have urn in Gen. Plural.
Hostis
Nubes
hostis
nubis
an enemy
a cloud
hostium.
nubiurn.
Lapis
Judex
lapidis
judicis
a stone
a judge
lapidum.
judicum.
Mater matris a mother.
Pater patris a father.
Vates vatis a prophet.
Canis canis a dog.
Frater fratris a brother.
Juvenis juveuis a youth.
2. The following three have um or ium.
Apis apis a bee.
Mensis mensis a month.
Sedes sedis a seat.
3. Monosyllables, the stem of which ends in two consonants, though
they increase in the Gen. Sing., have ium in the Gen. Plural, except
Lynx.
Arx arcis a citadel.
As (stem ass) assis a Roman coin.
Mons mentis a mountain.
Os (stem oss) ossis a bone.
4. Several monosyllables, the stems of which end in a single consonant,
though they increase in the Gen. Sing., have ium in the Gen. Plur. ; as
Faux faucis the throat.
Glis gliris a dormouse.
Lis litis a law -suit.
Mas maris a male.
Mus rrmris a mouse.
Nix nivis snow.
Strix strigis an owl.
Vis vis strength.
5. The Gen. Plural generally ends in ium, sometimes with Poets in um,
in words the Nom. Sing, of which is ens :
Cliens clientis a client.
Adolescens -entis a youth.
Prudens (Adj.) -entis prudent.
176 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
FOURTH DECLENSION.
1. The Dative Singular ui is often contracted into u : as,
gradm, gradw.
2. The following eleven words have the Dative and Ablative
Plural in ubus ; some have both forms, ubus and ibus.
Acus
acus
a needle
Portus
portus
a liarbour
Arcus
arcus
a bow
Quercus
quercus
an oak
Artus
artuum
joints
Specus
specus
a cave
Lacus
lacus
a lake
Tribus
tribus
a tribe
Partus
partus
a birth
Pecu
cattle
Yeru verfis a spit
3. Domus, a house, belongs partly to the second declension
and partly to the fourth declined see next page.
FIFTH DECLENSION.
1. All words are Feminine except meridies (m..) and dies,
which is common in the Singular, but must be mascu-
line in the Plural.
2. In the Gen. and Dat. Singular the ei is sometimes con-
tracted into e ; as, diei die, fidei fide.
3. Res and dies are the only words of this declension which
have a complete plural.
Series a series
Species -el an appearance
spei hope
4. Acies aciei a Une of battle
Effigies -ei an image
Facies -ei a face
have Nom., Yoc., Ace. Plural. No other words of the
declension have any Plural at all, except res, dies, men-
tioned above, and Virgil gives a Plural to glades (Georg. IV.
517).
5. In Gen. and Dat. Singular the e in ei is long after a
vowel, as diei, facie^, but doubtful after a consonant,
as fides, fide^.
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES, ETC.
177
DECLENSION OF PEOPER NAMES AND
IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES.
FIRST Dr
S. N. Epitome "g
V. Epitome g
A. Epitomen ,>
G. Epitomes
D. Epitomae
A. Epitome ^
CLENSION.
S. Cybele
Cybele
Cybelen
Cybeles.Cybelse
Cybelae
Cybele, Cybela
THIRD Di
S. N. Achilles -e~us
V. Achille -eu
A. Achillem, )
-en, -ea 3
G. Achillis, )
-61, -i, -gos ->
D. Achilli
A. Achillg
:CLENSION.
S. Pallas
Pallas
Palladem, -a
Palladis, -os
Palladi
Pal lade"
S. N. Anchises
V. Anchise (-a)
A. Anchisen(-am)
G. Anchisae
D. Anchisae
A. Anchise (-a)
S. ^Bneas
^Enea
^neau(-am)
.(Eneae
JEness
JSnea
S. N. Paris
V. Parl
A. Parldem, -a, -^
Parin -im j
G. Paridis,-dos
D. Paridi
A. ParidS
S. Pericles
Pericles, -Ss, -e
Periclem, -Sa
Periclis, Pericli
Pericli
Pericle
S. N. Thesides
V. Theside(-a, -a)
-A.Thesiden(-am)
G. Thesidse
D. Thesidae
A. Theside (-a)
P. Thesidae
Thesidsa
Thesidas
Thesidum
Thesidis
Thesidis
S.N.Socrates
V. Socrates, ^
Socrate 3
A. Socratem, -en
G. Socratls, -X
D. Socrati
A. Socrate, -6
S. Thales
Thales, -e
Thalem, -en, eta
Thalis, Thaletis
Thall, Thaletl
Thale, Thaletg
SECOND D
S. N. Deus (God)
V. Deus
A. Deum
G.Dei
D.Deo
A.Deo
ECLENSION.
P.Dei, Dii.Di
Dei, Dii, Di
Decs
Deorum, Deum
Deis, Diis, Dis
Deis, Diis, Dis
S. N. Chlamys
V. Chlamy ^
A. -dem, -a g
G.-dis
D. Chlamydi ^
A. Chlamyde
P. ChlamydSs,
Chlamydes, -as
Chlamydum
Chlamydibus
Chlamydibus
S. N. Domus c
V. Domus |
A. Domum -a
G. Domus ^
D. Domui or domo
A. Domo
P. Domus
Domus
Domus, domos
Domuum, -orum
Domibus
Domibus
S. N. Sappho
V. Sappho
A. Sappho, -nem
G. Sapphus, -onis
D. Sappho, -oni
A. Sappho, -one
N. Orpheus
V. Orpheu
A. Orpheum, -ea
G. Orphei', -eos
D. Orpheo,-ei',-ei
A. Orpheo
SING
N. Delos
V. Dele
A. Delon (-urn)
[JLAB.
G.Deli
D. Delo
A. Delo
178 NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
PECULIARITIES OF SUBSTANTIVES AND
ADJECTIVES.
Acer (adj.), acris, e, sharp. Abl. Sing., acri ; Nom., Voc., and Ace. Plur.
Neut., acria ; Gen. Plur. acrium.
Acies, aciei (f.), a line of battle. Only Nom., Voc., Ace., in the Plur.
Acus, -us (f.), a needle. Dat. and Abl. Plur., acubus.
Adolescens, -entis (c.), a youth. Gen. Plur., adolescentium.
Adulter, -eri (m.), an adulterer. Keeps the e in all cases.
^Edes (f.), in the Sing, is a temple; in the Plur., aedes, -ium, a house.
.ZEneas, -ae (m.), JEneas. Voc. Sing., .ZEnea ; Ace. Sing., .ZEneam or
-ZEnean.
Ambages, -is (f.), a winding. In Sing, only Abl. Gen. Plur., ambagum.
Amussis, -is (f.), a rule. Ace. Sing., amussim ; Abl. Sing, amussi.
Anchises, -as (m.), Anchises. Ace., Anchisen, or -am; Abl., Anchise or
Anchisa ; Voc. Anchise or -a, declined, see p. 177.
Animal, -is (n.), an animal. Nom., Voc., Ace. Plur., animalia; Gen.
Plur., animalium ; Abl. Sing., animali.
Apis, apis (f.), a bee. Also, apes, apis. Gen. Plur., apium and apum.
Aqua, aquae (f.), water. (Plur.) aquas, medicinal springs.
Arcus, -us (m.), a low. Dat. and Abl. Plur., arcubus, like acus.
Arma, -orum (n.), arms. Has no singular.
Artus, -uum (PL), (m.), limbs. Dat. and Abl. Plur., artubus, like acus.
Arx, arcis (f.), a citadel. Gen. Plur., arcium.
As, assis (m.), a small coin. Gen. Plur., assium, like arx.
Aurum, auri (n.), gold. Has no Plur.
Auxilium, -i (n.), help. (Plur.) auxilia, auxiliary forces.
Avis, -is (f.), a bird. Abl. Sing., avi and ave.
Barbaria, -aa (f.), barbarism. Also barbaries, barbariei.
Caalicola, -ae, a dweller in heaven. Gen. Plur., cselicolum.
Cselum, caeli (n.), (no plural), heaven.
Calcar, -aris (n.), a spur. Nom., Voc., and Ace. Plur., calcaria; Gen.
Plur., calcarium ; Abl. Sing., calcari.
Callus, -i (m.), also callum, -i (n.), hardened skin.
Canis, -is (c.), a dog. Gen. Plur., canum.
Carbasus, -i (f.), fine flax. (Plur.), carbasa (n.), sails.
Career, -eris (m.), a prison. Carceres, -um, a starting point.
PECULIAEITIES OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 179
Casses, -ium (PI.), (m.), a snare. Only Abl. in Sing.
Castrum (Sing.), -i (n.), a fort. (Plur.) castra, -orum, a camp.
Chlamys, chlamydis (f.), a cloaJc. Declined (see p. 177).
Clavis, -is (f.), a key. Ace. Sing., -im or -em. Abl., -i or -e.
Cliens, clientis (c.), a client. Gen. Plur., clientium and clientum.
Ccelebs, coelibis, unmarried (adj.). Abl. Sing., ccelibe.
Commentarius (m.), also commentarium, -i (n.), a note book.
Compos, compotis (adj.), having the mastery of. Abl. Sing., compote.
Copia, -83 (f.), plenty. (Plur.) copiaa, -arum, forces.
Cupressus, -i, and cupressus, -us (f.), a cypress.
(Daps), dapis (f.), a feast. No Nom. or Voc. Sing.
Dea, -SB (f.), a goddess. Dat. and Abl. Plur., deabus.
Delos, Deli (f.), Delos. Irr., declined at full length (see p. 177).
Deses, desidis (adj.), lazy. Abl. Sing., deside.
Deus, dei (m.), a god. Irr., declined at full length (see p. 177).
Dies, diei or die and dii, a day. Common in Sing., masc. in Plur.
(Ditio), ditionis (f.), a dominion. No Nom. Sing. ; no Plur.
Domus, -us (f.), a house. Declined (see p. 177).
Echo, echus (f.), echo. The other cases in o.
Effigies, effigiei (f.), an image. Has only Nom., Voc., and Ace. in Plur.
Epitome, epitomes (f.), an abridgment. Declined (see p. 177).
Eventus, -us (m.), eventum, -i (n.), an occurrence.
Faber, fabri (m.). Gen. Plur., fabrorum and fabrum.
Facies, faciei (f.), a face. Has only Nom., Voc., and Ace. in Plur.
Fas (n.), Divine law. Indeclinable.
(Faux) (f.) Sing., some times Abl., fauce ; Plur., fauces, faucium, etc.
Febris, febris (f.), fever. Ace. Sing., febrim and febrem; Abl. Sing.,
febri and febre.
FeriaB, feriarum (f.), holidays. Has no Sing.
Ficus, -i, and ficus, -us (f.), a fig tree.
Fides, fidei (f.), faith. Gen. Sing., fidei, also fide in poets ; Dat. Sing.,
fide in poets, or fidei.
Filia, -SB (f.), a daughter. Dat. and Abl. Plur., filiabus.
Filius, -i (m.), a son. Voc. Sing., fili ; Gen. Sing., filii and fill.
Frenum, -i (n.), a lit. Plur. freni (m.), frena (n.).
(Frux), fragis (f.), fruit. Has no Nom.
Grates, thanks (Plur.) ; usually only in Nom. and Aco. Abl. (Tacitus).
180 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
Gratia, -& (f.), favour; gratiae, -arum, thanks.
Gravis, -e (adj.), heavy. Nona., Voc., and Ace. Plur. neut., gravia ;
Gen. Plur., gravium; Abl. Sing., gravi.
Gener, generi (m.), a son-in-law. Keeps the e in all cases (like puer).
Genius, genii (m.), a genius. Declined like filius.
Glis, gliris (m.), a dormouse. Gen. Plur., glirium.
Hispalis, -is (f.), Seville. Ace. Sing., Hispalim.
Ignis, ignis (m.),fire. Abl. Sing., igni and igne.
Imber, imbris (m.), a shower. Abl. Sing., imbri and imbre.
Impedimentum, -i (n.), a hindrance. Plur., impedimenta, baggage.
Impos, impotis (adj.), not master of. Abl. Sing., impote.
Instar (n.), likeness. Indeclinable.
Jocus, -i (m.), a joke. Plur., joci (m.), joca (n.).
Jugerum, -i (n.), an acre. 2nd declension in Sing., 3rd in Plur. Nom.,
Voc., and Ace. Plur., jugera; Gen. Plur., jugerum ; Dat. and Abl.,
jugeribus.
Justitia, -se (injustice. Has no Plural.
Juvenis, -is (m.), a youth. Gen. Plur., juvenum.
Lacus, -us (m.), a lake. Dat. and Abl. Plur., lacubus, like acus.
Laelius, Laelii (m.), Lcelius. Declined like filius.
Lauras, -i (f.), a lay tree, and laurus, -iis.
Liber, Liberi (m.), Bacchus. Keeps the e in all cases.
Liberi, -orum (m.), children. Has no Sing.
Lis, litis (f.), a law suit. Gen. Plur., litium.
Littera, -se (f.), a letter (alphabet) ; litterse, -arum, an epistle.
Locus, -i (m.), a place ; loci (m. Plur.), loca (n. Plur.).
Ludus, -i (m.), play ; ludi, -orum, public games.
Luxuria, -ee (f.), luxury ; also luxuries, luxuriei.
Mare, maris (u.), the sea. Abl. Sing., mari; neut. Plur., maria.
Mas, maris (m.), a male. Gen. Plur., marium.
Materfamilias (f.), matrisfamiliae and matrisfamilias, the mother of a
family.
PECULIARITIES OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 181
Materia, -SB (f.), timber ; and materies, -ei.
Memor, -oris (adj.), mindful. Abl. Sing., memori.
Menda, -SB (f.), and mendum, -i (n.), a fault.
Mensis, -is (m.), a month. Gen. Plur., mensum or mensium.
Messis, -is (f.), a harvest. Ace. Sing., messem or messim.
Mollitia, -as, softness; and mollities, -ei (f.).
Mons, montis (m.), a mountain. Gen. Plur., montium.
Mus, muris (m.), a mouse. Gen. Plur., murium.
Nata, -ae (f.), a daughter. Dat. and Abl. Plur., natabus.
Navis, -is (f.), a ship. Aec. Sing., navim ornavem.
Nefas (n.), crime. Indeclinable.
Nihil (n.), nothing. Indeclinable.
Nix, nivis (f.), snow. Gen. Plur., nivium.
Numus and minimus, -i (m.), money. Gen. Plur., numorum and numum.
Opera, -83 (f.), an exertion; operas, -arum (m.), workmen.
(Ops) opis (f.), strength ; opes, opum (Plur.), wealth.
Orpheus, Orphe'i, Orpheos (m.), Orpheus. Declined (see p. 177).
Os, ossis (n.), a bone. Gen. Plur., ossium.
Pallas, Palladis or Pallados (f.), Minerva. Declined (see p. 177).
Paris, Paridis or Paridos (m.), Pan's. Declined (see p. 177).
Partus, -iis (m.), a birth. Dat. and Abl. Plur., partubus, like acus.
Paterfamilias, patrisfamiliae and patrisfamilias (m.), father of a family.
Pauper, pauperis (adj.), poor. Abl. Sing., paupere.
Pecu (-us) (n.), cattle. Dat. and Abl. Plur., pecubus, like acus.
Pelagus, -i (n.), the sea. Has no Plural.
Pelvis, -is (f.), a basin. Ace. Sing., pelvim and pelvem.
Pericles, -is and -i (m.), Pericles. Declined at full length (see p. 177).
Pinus, -us, and pinus, -i (f.), a pine.
Plebs, plebis, and plebes, -is, -ei (f.), common people.
Portus, -us (m.), harbour. Dat., Abl. Plur., portubus and portibus.
(Prex) (precis) (f.), a prayer. Nom. and Gen. Sing, not used.
Princeps, principis (adj.), chief. Abl. Sing., principe.
Prudens, prudentis (adj.), prudent. Abl. Sing., prudenti and prudente;
Nom., Voc., and Ace. Plur. (n.), prudentia.
182 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER,
Pubes and puber, puberis (adj.), adult.
Puer, pueri (m.), a boy. Keeps the e in all cases.
Puppis, -is (f.), a ship. Ace. Sing., puppim and puppem. Abl. Sing.,
puppi and puppe.
Quercus, -us (f.), an oak. Dat. and Abl. Plur., quercubus.
Rastrum, -i (f.), a rake. (Plur.) rastri, -orum (m.), rastra, -orum (n.).
(Ravis), -is (f.), hoarseness. Ace. Sing., ravim.
Requies, -etis (f.), rest. Ace. Sing., requietem and requiem. Abl. Sing.
requiete and requie.
Restis, -is (f.), a rope. Ace., restim or restem. Abl. Sing., reste.
Rostrum, -i (n.), a beak. (Plur.) rostra, -orum, a platform for speaking.
Sappho, -us and -onis (f.), Sappho. Declined at full length (see p. 177).
Securis, -is (f.), an axe. Ace. Sing., securim and securem ; Abl. Sing.,
securi.
Sedes, -is (f.), a seat. Gen. Plur., sedum and sedium."
Series (f.), a series. Has only Nom., Ace., and Abl. Sing.
Sibilus, -i (m.), a hissing. (Plur.) sibili and sibila, sibilos and sibila.
Sitis, -is (f.), thirst. Ace. Sing., sitim; has no Plur.
Socer, -en (m.), a father-in-law. Keeps the e in all cases, like puer.
Species, -ei (f.), an appearance. Has only Nona., Voc., and Ace. Plur.
Specus, -us (m.), a cave. Dat. and Abl., specubus, like acus.
Spes, spei (f.), hope. Has only Nom., Voc., and Ace. Plur.
(Spons), Abl. sponte (f.), of one's own accord.
Strix, strigis (f.), an owl. Gen. Plur., strigium.
Strues, struis (f.), a heap. Gen. Plur., struum.
Suggestus, -us (m.), and suggestum, -i (n.), a platform for speakers.
Supellex, supellectilis (f.), household utensils. Abl., supellectili and -e.
Superstes, superstitis (adj.), only surviving. Abl. Sing., superstite.
Sus, suis (c.), a swine. Dat. plur. subus (Lucretius), and suibus.
Tabula, -SB (f.), a board; tabulae, -arum, writing tablets.
Tartarus, -i (m.), Tartarus. (Plur.) Tartara, -orum (n).
Tenebrae, -arum (f.), darkness. Has no Sing.
Terrigena, -re (c.), earth born. Gen. Plur., terrigeniim.
Tiberis, -is (m.), the Tiber. Ace. Sing., Tiberim, Tibrim (from Tibris) ;
Abl. Sing., -i.
PECULIARITIES OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 183
Tribus, -us (f.), a tribe. Dat. and Abl. Plur., tribubus.
Tristis, -e (adj.), sad. Abl. Sing., tristi.
Turris, -is (f.), a tower. Ace. Sing., turrim and turrem ; Abl. Sing., turri
and turre.
Tussis, -is (f.), a cough. Ace., tussim ; Abl. Sing., tussi.
Vas, vasis (n.), a vessel. 3rd dec. in Sing., 2nd in Plur ; (Plur.) vasa,
vasorum.
Vates, vatis (c.), a prophet. Gen. Plur., vatum.
(Verber), verberis (n.), a stripe. Abl. Sing., verbere ; only Gen. and Abl.
in Sing., full Plur.
Veru, verus (n.), a spit. Dat. and Abl. Plur., verubus and veribus.
Vesper, vesperis (3) and -eri (2) (m.), the evening. Ace. Sing., vesperum ;
keeps the e in all cases. Also vespera, -88 (f.).
Virus, viri (n.), poison. Has no Plural.
Vis, vis (f.), strength. Ace. Sing., vim; (Plur.) Nom., Voc., and Ace.,
vires, virium. Gen. and Dat. Sing., very rare.
Volucris, volucris (f.), a bird. Gen. Plur., volucrum.
Vulgus, -i (n.), common people. Has no Plural.
APPENDIX.
Ales, alitis (c.), a bird. Abl. Sing., alite and -e ; Gen. Plur., alitum and
alituum.
(Cassis, cassis) (m.), a net, snare. Only Abl., casse, in Sing. Full Plural.
Grus, gruis (c.), a crane. Nom. Sing., gruis (Phcedrus).
Lien, lienis, and lienis, lienis (m.), milt, spleen.
Obex, obicis and objicis (c.), a bolt.
Palus, paludis (f.), a marsh. Gen. Plur., paludum and paludium.
Parens, parentis (c.), a parent. Gen. Plur., parentum and parentium.
Poema, poematis (n.), a poem. Dat. and Abl. Plur., poematis.
Eenes, renum (m.), kidneys. Has no Singular.
Sanguis, sanguinis (m.), blood. Has no Plural.
Amnis, a river, Collis, a hill, Fustis, a cudgel,
Clunis, a buttock, Finis, a boundary, Postis, a door,
besides those mentioned and many others, have Abl. Sing, in i and e.
184 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE ROMAN CALENDAR.
The Roman month had three chief days, with reference io
which the other days were reckoned.
These days were the Kalends (Kalends), which fell on the 1st;
the Nones (NonjB), 5th ;
the Ides (Idus), 13th.
But in
March, July, October, May,
The Nones were on the 7th day,
and the Ides on the 15th, or eight days later.
All other days were counted backwards from these three
points ; in other words, the Romans did not say such a day
after the Kalends, Nones, or Ides, but such a day before these
three principal days.
To express a date in Latin observe these rules :
(a) For days before the Kalends, add two to the number of
days in the month, and subtract the day of the month from
the result so obtained.
(6) For days before the Nones and Ides, add one to the day
on which they respectively fall, and subtract the day of the
month from the result.
E.g. To express the 16th of January in Latin
January contains 31 days ; add 2 to this, and you have
33. 33 16 = 17. So that you find January 16th = ante diem
septimum decimum Kalendas Februarias ; or, as it is usually
written, a. d. XVII. Kal. Feb.
THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 185
To express February 3rd. The Nones fell on the 5th;
Add 1, aud the result is 6; 63=3. Therefore, February
3rd=a. d. III. Non. Feb. '
To express May 13th. The Ides of May fell on the 15th ;
add 1 to this, and you have 16 ; 16 13=3. Therefore, May
13th=a. d. III. Id. Mai.
To express in Latin the date of a year the ordinal numerals
must be used ; e.g. A.D. 1885=Anno post Christum natum
millesimo octingentesiino octogesimo quinto.
The Kalends, Nones, and Ides of January, etc., will be
expressed by Kalendis, Nonis*, Idibus, Januariis, etc. ; or,
briefly, by Kal. Jan. : Non. Jan. : Id. Jan., etc
The day before the Kalends, Nones, and Ides of January,
etc., is expressed by Pridie Kalendas, Nonas, Idus, Januarias,
etc.; or, briefly, Prid. Kal., Non., Id., Jan.
In leap year February 24 (a. d. VI. Kal. Mart.) was reckoned
twice ; and the day was called dies bissextus, whence the
term, bissextile, as applied to leap year.*
The Latin names of the months, which are adjectives
(agreeing with mensis), are Januarius, Februarius, Marfcius,
Aprilis, Maius, Junius, Julius (or Quintilis), Augustus (or
Sextilis), September, October, November, December.
Those in -us are declined like bonus; those in -is like
tristis ; those in -er like acer.
* The intercalated day was counted between a. d. VI. and a. d. VII.,
and called a. d. bissextum Kal. Mart. ; so that a. d. VII. answers as in
ordinary years to Feb. 23rd.
N
186 NEW EASY LATIN PEIMER.
ROMAN MONEY.
There were two principal coins, lie As (genitive assis) and
the Sestertius (a silver coin = 2J asses'), the symbol for which
was HS.
The As, or pound of 12 ounces (uncice), was thus divided:
Uncia = 1 oz., or -^ of the As.
Sextans =2 T a T = -i
Quadrans =3 , & = i ,
Triens =4 J? _*_ = i .,
Quincunx =5 ,, T 5 2-
Semis =6 .JL. = i ,,
Septunx = 7 T V
Bes =8 M ' A = I
Dodrans = 9 T V = I
Dextans =10 if = -- ,,
Deunx = 11 #
The following terms were used in bequeathing property :
Heres ex asse. Heir to the whole estate.
Heres ex sextante. of the ,,
Heres ex besse. ,, ,, ,,
Etc., etc., etc.
Interest was reckoned monthly at the rate of so much per
100 asses.
Hence
Uncise usurse = T \ per cent, per month = 1 per cent.
per annum.
Sextan tes usurse = per cent, per month = 2 per cent-
per annum.
Quadrantes usurss = per cent, per month = 3 per
cent, per annum.
ROMAN MONEY. 187
Asses usurse = 1 per cent, per month = 12 per cent, per
annum.
= 2 ^ or 24 ^ per cent.
/ per cent.
= 3 f J . , 36 } per an-
. \ per month . I r
= 4 J r 48 J num.
Instead of asses usuree we find centesimse :
So, Binge centesimse = 2
Trinee
Quaternas
The sestertii, or sesterce, as we have said, was a coin.
The sestertiwm was the name of a sum (= 1,000 sestertii),
and is only used in the plural.
Sestertm, HS, joined with Cardinal or Distributive numbers,
means so many thousand sesterces.
The Numeral adverbs joined with (or understanding) sestertii
(gen. sing.), sestertium, or HS, denote so many 100,000
sesterces.
Thus, Tres sestertii = 3 sesterces.
Trecenti sestertii =300 ,,
Mille sestertium = 1,000
Duo millia sestertium, or duo )
... > = 2,000 .,
sestertia 3
Decem millia sestertium = 10,000
Centum millia sestertium,
Centena millia sestertium J> = 100,000
Centum sestertia
Ter centena millia sestertium,
Ter sestertium
Decies centena millia sestertium, ) n
TA j i-A r = 1,UUU,UUU ,,
Decies sestertium 3
Quadringenties sestertium = 40,000,000
NOTE. HS. X = Sestertii decem =10 sesterces.
HS. X= Sestertia decem =10,000
HS. X = Sestertiwn decies = 1,000,000
] = 300,000
188 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
PARSING.
There is but little doubt that the generality of teachers, whether
at public or private schools, make use of Parsing too much as a
means of teaching the Grammar of a sentence, whereas it should
more properly be used simply as a test of what the pupil knows.
As also dictation is often improperly used as a means of teaching
spelling, though it is a most capital exercise and test when the
pupil has learned to spell fairly.
Much time is wasted over Parsing. The pupil has to say every-
thing he knows of a word, whether it is Masculine or Feminine,
Singular or Plural ; and of a Verb, what Conjugation, Voice,
Mood, Tense, Number, Person, etc. Careful and diligent teachers
boast that they do this with their pupils every day. The pupil
no doubt gets up the required form by rote, but half the time
does not understand what he is about ; and if asked what Gender
and why, cannot answer without thinking.
The simplest form of Parsing is the best, as not wearying
either to the teacher or the pupil. Below is an example :
Maturus fructus dulcem saporem hdbet.
M aturus fruct us ripe fruit habet has dulcem saporem a sweet taste.
Maturus. Nominative Case, to agree with its substantive fructus.
Fructus. Nominative Case to the verb habet.
Dulcem. Accusative Case, to agree with its substantive saporem.
Saporem. Accusative Case governed by the verb halet.
Habet. Third Person Singular, to agree with its Nominative
Ca,se fructus.
This is all that is required to enable a pupil to understand the
construction of the sentence.
It is certainly most important that much more than this should
be known; but, according to the teaching of this little book, the
pupil would know it. He would know as well as his teacher that
maturus was an Adjective, Masculine Gender and Singular Num.
ber, and declined like bonus, or certainly he would not and could
not be doing exercises.
And so with dulcem. If he did not know that dulcem was an
Adjective of two terminations, declined like tristis, and that did-
PAUSING. 189
cem in itself -was Masculine or Feminine, but Masculine in this
sentence because it has to agree with saporem, he certainly would
have to shut his Exercise book and take to his Grammar again.
There must be added a word or two about this Parsing for
those who wish to learn Latin by themselves, that they may
teach it to others.
Maturus is the Nominative Case, simply and for no other reason
than that it has to agree with fructus, which is Nomina-
tive. Being an Adjective, it has nothing to do with the
Verb, or with anything but a Substantive.
Fructus is the Nominative Case to the verb habet. Hdbet stand-
ing in the sentence must have some Nominative, either
expressed or understood; as fructus is a Nominative,
then fructus must be taken.
Dulcem is the Accusative Case not governed by the Verb, for
being an Adjective it has nothing to do with anything
but a Substantive; but it is the Accusative Case to
agree with saporem, because saporem is the Accusative.
Saporem is the Accusative Case governed by the verb Jiabet.
Habet must take some Accusative Case after it what
is it but saporem ?
Habet is the Third Person Singular, to agree with its Nominative
C&se fructus (or maturus fructus). Habet is the Singu-
lar Number because fructus is, and Third Person because
every thing and every person but " you " or " I," " you "
or " we" is the Third Person.
But were there any idea that the pupil did not know every
particular about each word, then each word should be taken,
and he should be questioned upon it in every way.
Saporem. What Case? Why? What Declension? How do
you know the Declension ? What Gender ? Why ?
Halet. What Part of Speech? What Voice Mood Tense ?
What Person? Why? What Conjugation? How do
you know that it is the Second Conjugation ?
But then a pupil taught as by this book would know this, and
there would be no need to ask these questions once a month.
190 NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
ORDER OF LATIN WORDS.
I. In short Latin sentences the Nominative will come first.
Pisces extra aquam cito exspirant.
Fish quickly expire out of the water.
II. As a general rule, the Verb comes last.
Milites trans hostium fertiles agros ibant.
The soldiers were going across the fertile fields of the enemy.
III. The word governed is generally placed before the
word that governs it ; as,
Pomum habet, not Habet pomum.
Urbis portas clausit, not Portas urbis clausit.
IV. The Possessive Pronoun will usually come after the
word it agrees with ; as,
Puer librum suum amisit, not Puer suum librum amisit.
V. The Adjective mostly comes after the Substantive with
which it agrees ; as,
Poetafiliam bonam habet.
VI. This Adjective may however be separated from its Sub-
stantive by a Genitive (with its Adjective) depending
on that Substantive, in which case it precedes the
Genitive ; as,
Puer bonam poeissfiliam videt ;
as also
Puer bonam sapientis -poetssfiliam videt.
The boy sees the good daughter of the wise poet.
VII. The Adverb will come generally next before the word
to which it belongs ; as,
Pisces extra aquam cito exspirant.
ORDER OP LATIN WORDS. 191
VIII. The Preposition, as a general rule, must come IMME-
DIATELY before the word to which it belongs ; as in
the last sentence,
Pisces extra aquam cito exspirant.
IX. It may however (see p. 112)
(a) Go before the Adjective that agrees with the Sub-
stantive ; as, Milites trans fer tiles agros ibant. Or
(6) Before a Genitive depending on that word; as,
Milites trans hostium fertiles agros ibant.
X. Conjunctions which join words together must of neces-
sity come between such words ; as, Hare et terra.
If que is used instead of et, it will be affixed to the word
to which it belongs ; as, Mare terramquQ videt.
If the conjunction join sentences together, it will come
between the sentences ; as, Multa vidit et plura audivit.
XI. Autem, enim, vero, quidem, quoque, igitur, may not stand
first in the sentence ; but namque sed, equidem, ergo,
itaque, tamen, may stand first.
XII. The Interjection will be the first word in the sentence.
There is also another way of telling the proper order for
Latin words; viz. according to emphasis. The word which
is of first importance is first in the arrangement of words.
Hence the emphatic words precede others. The following
will at least explain what is meant by the above rule :
1. Will you go into the town to-morrow }
Visne eras in oppidum ire ?
2. Will you go into the town to-morrow ?
Tune in oppidum eras ire vis ?
3. Will you go into the town to-morrow ?
Crasne in oppidum ire vis ?
192
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMER.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
Page 72.
FOUR GENERAL RULES.
LATIN.
A.
Verbum Finitum cum
nominativo Subject! congruit
nnraero et persona. 88. I.
B.
Adjectivum genere,numero,
et casu congruit cum eo cui
attribnitnr. 89. II.
C.
Substantivumcasu congruH
cum eo cui apponitur. 90. III.
D.
Relativum cum Antecedents
congruit, genere, numero, et
persona; sed casu spectat
suam clausulam. 91. IV.
ENGLISH.
A.
A Verb Finite agrees with
the nominative of its Subject
in Number and Person. 88.
I.
B.
An Adjective agrees in
Gender, Number, and Case
with that to which it is in
attribution. 89. II.
C.
A Substantive agrees in
case with that to which it is
in apposition. 90. III.
D.
A Relative agrees with its
Antecedent in Gender, Num-
ber, and Person ; but in Case
belongs to its own clause.
91. IV.
The Letter or figure at the top of each Eule refers to Syntax, Pa r t II.
The figures after each Rule refer to the Public School Latin Primer.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
193
THE VERB AND ITS NOMINATIVE OR SUBJECT.
LATIN.
I.
Finiti Verbi Subjectum Nomi-
nativus est. 93. 1.
V.
Cum Subjecto composite pluralia
congruunt. 92.
VI.
In diversitate personarum
Verba congruunt cum Priore Per-
sona. 92. 1.
VII.
Infinitivum stat substantive,
pro nominativo vel Accusative.
140. 1. 1.
VIII.
Clausulae pro
ponuntur. 156 (3).
Substantivis
ENGLISH.
I.
The Subject of a Finite Verb is
a Nominative. 93. 1.
V.
With a composite Subject Plural
words agree. 92.
VI.
If the Persons differ, Verbs
agree with the Prior Person. 92. 1.
VII.
The Infinitive stands substan-
tively for nominative or Accusative.
140. I. 1.
VIII.
Clauses are put for Substantives.
156 (3).
THE VERB AND ITS ACCUSATIVE OR OBJECT.
Accusativus est Casu Proprioris
Objecti. Necnon limitandi vim
habet.
I.
Verba Transitiva regunt Accusa-
tivum Objecti.
III.
Intransitiva capiunt Accusati-
vum vi cognata. 97.
The Accusative is the Case of
the nearer Object. It has also the
power of limiting.
I.
Transitive Verbs govern an Ac-
cusative of the Object.
III.
Intransitive Verbs take an Ac-
cusative of kindred meaning. 97.
THE NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
Verba Copulativa, sive Finita
sive Infinitiva, complementum ple-
rumque cum Subjecto congruens
habent. 94.
Copulative Verbs, whether Finite
or Infinitive, generally have a
complement agreeing with the
Subject. 94.
This applies also to the Accusative.
<
194
NEW EAST LATIN PRIMEK.
THE GENITIVE AFTEE THE VEEB.
Page 79.
I.
Genitivus ita stat ut suppleri
possit,
indoles munus
indicium officium 127. b.
II.
Interest, refert, Genitivum ad-
mittunt. 129. III.
Eadem pro Genitivis Prono-
minum usurpant bos casus, mea,
tud, suci, nostril, vestra, cum recon-
gruentes. 129. III. a.
III.
Genitivus adjungitur Verbis et
Adjectivis quibus significatur
Potentia et impotentia.
Criminatio, innocentia.
Damnatio, absolutio.
Memoria et oblivio.
133. II.
IV.
Ex Adjectivis et Verbis abun-
dandi vel egendi, ditandi vel pri-
vandi, pleraque Ablativum capiunt,
multa etiam Genitivum. 119. IX. b.
V.
Ulisereor, miseresco, Genitivum
capiunt ; miseror, commiseror Accu-
sativum. 135. IV.
VI.
Memini, reminiscor, recorder,
obliviseor, Genitivum vel Accusa-
tivum adinittunt. 133. II. a.
VII.
Piget, pudet, pcenitet, teedet,
atque miseret, Impersonalia, Geni-
tivum capiunt cum Accusative.
134. III.
I.
A Genitive so stands that nature,
token, function, duty, can be sup-
plied. 127. b.
II.
Interest (it imports), refert (it
concerns) admit a Genitive. 129. III.
The same verbs, instead of the
Genitives of Pronouns, use these
cases, mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra,
agreeing with re. 129. III. a.
HI.
A Genitive is joined to Verbs
and Adjectives which signify
Power and impotence.
Inculpation, innocence.
Condemnation, acquittal.
Memory and.forgetfulness.
133. II.
IV.
Most Adjectives and Verbs of
abounding or wanting, enriching
or depriving, take an Ablative ;
many also a Genitive. 119. IX. b.
V.
Misereor, miseresco (I pity), take
a Genitive ; miseror, commiseror
(I compassionate), an Accusative.
135. IV.
VI.
Memini, reminiscor, recorder
(I remember), obliviseor (I forget)
admit Genitive or Accusative. 133.
II. a.
VII.
Piget (it irks), pudet (it shames),
poenitet (it repents), tasdet (it dis-
gusts), and miseret (it moves pity),
impersonal Verbs, take a Genitive
with an Accusative. 134. III.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
195
THE DATIVE AFTER THE VERB.
Pages 80, 81.
LATIN.
Datmts est casus Recipientis seu
Remotioris Object!. 104.
Trajectiva, quse sensum trajiciunt
ad Remotius objectum, sunt multa
Adjectiva, Adverbia, et Verba,
rarius Substantiva, quibus indica-
tur:
Propinquitas et contraria.
Demonstratio et contraria.
Gratificatio et contraria.
Dominatio et contraria.
105. 1.
II.
Inter Trajectiva sunt multa
Verba composita cum Particulis,
quales sunt :
Bene, male, satis, re,
Ad, ante, con, in, inter, de,
ob, sub, super, post, et prcs.
106. a.
III.
Sum, cum compositis, prater
possum, capit Dativum. 107. II. b.
IV.
Est, sunt, cum Dativo, habere
saepe significant. 107. II. c.
V.
Dativus Propositi pro comple-
rnento ponitur, adjuncto saepe
Dativo Recipientis. 108. III.
ENGLISH.
The Dative is the case of the
Recipient or Remoter object. 104.
I.
"Words which carry their mean-
ing over to a Remoter Object are
called Trajective, and include
many Adjectives, Adverbs, and
Verbs, more rarely Substantives,
by which is implied
Nearness and its contraries.
Demonstration and its contraries.
Gratification and its contraries.
Dominion and its contraries.
105. I.
H.
Among Trajective words are
many Verbs compounded with
Particles, such as :
bene, well.
male, ill.
satis, enough.
re, ad, ante, con, in, inter, de, ob,
sub, super, post, et prae.
106. a.
III.
Sum, with its compounds, ex-
cept possum, takes a Dative. 107.
II. 6.
IV.
Est, sunt, with a Dative, often
imply having. 107. II. c.
V.
A Dative of the Purpose is used
as a complement, a Dative of the
Recipient being often added. 108.
196
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
THE ABLATIVE AFTEE THE VERB.
Page 81.
LATIN.
I.
Ablativum regunt :
(1) Verba
fungor, fruor,
vescor,
potior, dignor.
* (2) Adjectiva
dignus, indignus,
contentus, fretus,
prceditus.
(3) Substantiva,
opus, usus.
119. IX. a.
II.
Ex Acljectivis et Verbis abun-
dandi vel egendi, ditandi vel pri-
vandi, pleraque Ablativum capiunt,
multa etiam Genitivum. 119. &.
III.
Praepositiones etiam compositaG
regunt Ablativum, praesertim ab,
de, ex. 122. XII. a.
ENGLISH.
I.
These words govern an Ablative :
(1) The Verbs :
Fungor, to perform.
Fruor, to enjoy.
Utor, to use.
Vescor, to eat.
Potior, get possession of.
Dignor, deem worthy.
(2) The Adjectives :
Dignus, worthy.
Indignus, unworthy.
Contentus, content.
Fretus, relying.
Praeditus, endued.
(3) The Substantives :
Opus, need.
Usus, use.
119. IX. a.
II.
Most Adjectives and Verbs of
abounding or ivanting, enriching or
depriving, take an Ablative ; many
also a Genitive. 119. b.
III.
Prepositions, even when com-
pounded, govern an Ablative, espe-
cially ab, de t ex. 122. XII. a.
* It has been thought convenient to place the Adjectives and the Substantives
here to make the rule complete.
RULES OP SYNTAX.
197
VEEBS WHICH TAKE TWO CASES.
Page 82.
ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE.
LATIN.
I.
Genitivus adjungitur Vefbis et
Adjectivis quibus significatur :
Potentia et impotentia.
Criminatio, innocentia.
Damnatio, absolutio.
Memoria et oblivia.
133. II.
II.
Piget, pudet, poenitet, t&det,
atque miseret, Impersonalia, Geni-
tivum capiunt cum Accusative.
134 III.
ENGLISH.
I.
A Genitive is joined to Verbs and
Adjectives which signify :
Power and impotence.
Inclination, innocence.
Condemnation, acquittal.
Memory and forg et fulness.
133. II.
II.
Piget (it irks), pudet (it shames),
poenitet (it repents), tasdet (it dis-
gusts), miseret (it moves pity), Im-
personal verbs, take a Genitive with
an Accusative. 134. HI.
The above do not necessarily always take two cases.
ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE.
Trajectiva quas sensum trajiciunt
ad Eemotius Objectum, sunt nmlta
Adjectiva, Adverbia, et verba> rarius
Substantiva, quibus indicatur :
Propinquitas et contraria.
Demonstratio et contraria.
Gratificatio et contraria.
Dominatio et contraria.
105. I.
Words which carry their mean-
ing over to a Remote Object are
called Trajective, and include many
Adjectives, Adverbs, and Verbs,
more rarely Substantives, by which
is implied :
Nearness and its contraries.
Demonstration and its contraries.
Gratification and its contraries.
Dominion and its contraries.
105. I.
The above do not necessarily always take two cases.
198
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMES.
VEEBS WHICH TAKE EITHER OF TWO CASES.
Page 83.
GENITIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.
LATIN.
Memini, reminiscor, recorder,
Genitivum vel Accusativum admit-
tunt. 133. II. a.
ENGLISH.
Memini, reminiscor, recorder (I
remember), obliviscor (I forget), ad-
mit Genitive or Accusative.
II. a.
133.
GENITIVE OR ABLATIVE.
Ex Adjectivis et Verbis abun-
dandi vel egendi, ditandi vel pri-
vandi, pleraque Ablative capiunt,
multa etiam Genitivum. 119. IX. &.
Most Adjectives and Verbs of
abounding or wanting, enriching
or depriving, take an Ablative;
many also a Genitive. 119. IX. &.
VEEBS WHICH TAKE A DOUBLE CASE.
Page 83.
Two ACCUSATIVES PERSON AND THING.
I.
Verba qusedam, rogandi praeser-
tim et docendi, binos adrnittunt
Accusatives, alterum Eei, alterum
Persona?. 98.
Some Verbs, especially those of
asking and teaching, admit two
Accusatives, one of the thing, the
other of the Person. 98.
Two ACCUSATIVES OBJECT AND COMPLEMENT.
I. I.
Verba quasdam faciendi, vocandi,
putandi, similia, binos habent
Accusatives, alterum Objecti, al-
terum Obliqui Complementi. 99.
* Certain Verbs, of making,
calling, thinking, and the like,
have two Accusatives, one of the
Object, the other of the Oblique
Complement. 99.
Two DATIVES SUM WITH OTHER WORDS.
I. I.
Dativus Propositi pro Comple-
ment ponitur, adjuncto
Dativo Eecipientis. 108. III.
A Dative of the Purpose is used as
a Complement, a Dative of the Ee-
cipient being often added. 108. III.
* These are called Factitive Verbs.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
199
ADJECTIVES AND THEIE CASES.
Pages 84, 85.
GENITIVE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE.
ENGLISH.
LATIN.
I.
Genitivus ReiDemensae Vocabula
Quantitatis et Neutra Adjectiva
comitatur. 131. B.
II.
Genitivus objective jungitur Sub-
stantivis, Adjectivis, aut Participiis,
quibus transitiva queedam vis est,
prasertim si significant :
Peritiam, curam, desiderium.
Vel quidquid erit his contrarium.
132. I.
Genitivus adjungitur Verbis et
Adjectivis quibus significantur :
Potentia et impotentia.
Criminatio, innocentia.
Damnatio, dbsolutlo.
Memoria et oblivio. 133. II.
A Genitive of the Thing Measured
is joined to Words of Quantity and
Neuter Adjectives. 131. B.
II.
A Genitive is joined objectively
to Substantives, Adjectives, or Par-
ticiples if they signify skill, care,
desire, or whatever is contrary to
these. 132. I.
A Genitive is joined to Verbs
and Adjectives which signify :
Power and impotence.
Inculpation, innocence.
Condemnation, acquittal.
Memory &ud.forgetfulness. 133. II.
DATIVE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE.
Trajectiva capiunt Dativum,
quum significatur :
(1) Propinquitas ; (2) Demon-
stratio; (3) Gratificatio; (4) Do-
minatio ; et contraria. 106.
Trajective Words take a Dative
when the meanings implied are :
(1) Nearness ; (2) Demonstra-
tion ; (3) Gratification ; (4) Domi-
nion ; and their contraries. 106.
THE ABLATIVE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE.
I.
Ablativum regunt :
Adjectiva dignu t indignus, con-
tentus, fretus, prceditus.
119. IX. a. 2.
II.
Ex Adjectivis et Verbis abun-
dandi vel egendi, ditandi vel pri-
vandi, pleraque Ablativum capiunt,
multa etiam Genitivum. 119. b.
I.
These words govern an Ablative :
The Adjectives dignus (ivorthy),
indignus (unworthy) , contentus
(content), fretus (relying), praeditus
(endued). 119. IX. a. 2.
II.
Most Adjectives and Verbs of
abounding or wanting, enriching or
depriving, take an Ablative ; many
also a Genitive. 119. b.
Also the Substantives opus and usus take an Ablative. 119. IX. a. 3.
200
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
DIFFEKENT USES OF CASES.
Page 86.
*** These
" different uses of Cases " are not intended to
include the Case after the Verb or Adjective, which has been
already given.
NOMINATIVE.
LATIN.
I.
Finiti Verbi Subjectum Nomi-
nativus est. 93. 1.
II.
Substantivum casu congruit cum
eo cui apponitur. 90.
III.
Noininativus et Accusativus in
exclamando usurpantur . vel sine
Interjectione vel cum Interjectione.
138.
IV.
Quam cum Nominative.
124. XIV. 1.
ENGLISH.
I.
The Subject of a Finite Verb is
a Nominative. 93. 1.
II.
A Substantive agrees in case
with that to which it is Apposition.
90.
III.
The Nominative and the Accu-
sative are used in Exclamations
either without an Interjection or
with an Interjection. 138.
IV.
Quam with Nominative.
124. XIV. I.
VOCATIVE.
Vocativus extra sententiam stat
vel sine Interjectione vel cum In-
terjectione. 137.
The Vocative stands out of the
sentence either without an Inter-
jection or with an Interjection.
137.
EULES OF SYNTAX.
201
ACCUSATIVE.
Pages 86, 87.
LATIN.
I.
Tnfinitivi Subjeetum in Accu-
sative ponitur. 93. 2.
II.
Substantivnm casu congruit cum
eo cui apponitur. 90. III.
III.
Accusativus Kespectus adjungi-
tur Verbis et Adjectivis, praesertim
apud poetas. 100.
IV.
Nominativus et Accusativus in
Exclamaiido usurpantur vel sine
Interjectione vel cum Inter jectione.
138.
V.
Duratio Temporis in Accusative
ponitur. 102. 1.
VI.
Mensura Spatii in Accusative
ponitur. 102. 2.
VII.
Accusativum regunt multaa Praa-
positiones. 103.
VIII.
Locus, quo itur, in Accusative
ponitur, iclque sine Praepositione,
si vel oppidi nomen est, vel domm,
rus. 1U1.
IX.
Quam cum Accusative.
124. XIV. 2.
ENGLISH.
I.
The Subject of an Infinitive is
put in the Accusative. 93. 2.
II.
A Substantive agrees in case
with that to which it is in Apposi-
tion. 90. III.
III.
The Accusative of Eespect is
joined to Verbs and Adjectives,
especially in poetry. 100.
IV.
The Nominative and the Accusa-
tive are used in Exclamations either
without an Interjection or with au
Interjection. 138.
V.
The Duration of Time is put in
the Accusative. 102. 1.
VI.
The Measure of Space is put in
the Accusative. 102. 2.
VII.
Many Prepositions govern an
Accusative Case. 103.
VIII.
The place, whither one goes, is
put in the Accusative ; and with-
out a Preposition, if it is either the
name of a town, or domus (home),
rus (country}. 101.
IX.
Quam with the Accusative.
124. 2.
202
NEW EASY LATIN PEIMEE.
LATIN.
I,
Genitivus Auctoris et Possessoris.
127. I.
II.
Substantivum casu, etc.
III.
Genitivus qualitatis,
theto. 128. II.
IV.
Notentur elliptic! Genitivi :
GENITIVE.
Page 87.
ENGLISH.
I.
Genitive of the Author and
Possessor. 127. I.
II.
A Substantive agrees in case
etc. 90 III.
III.
cum epi- Genitive of quality with epithet.
128. II.
IV.
Genitives may be
quibus supple pretii.
128. II. a.
Substantivum casu, etc.
II.
Ita Dativus ponitur cum
va I 139.
The elliptic
remarked :
parvi minoris minimi Parvi, of small worth; minoris,
magni pluris plurimi of less value ; minimi, of very little
tanti quanti maximi worth. Magni, of great price;
pluris, of more value; plurimi, of
high value. Tanti, of so great
price; quanti, of what price;
maximi, of very great price. To
which supply pretii. 128. II. a.
DATIVE.
Page 87.
I.
A Substantive agrees in case, etc.
II.
So the Dative is put with hei,
(alas!) \s&(woe !) 139.
ABLATIVE.
Page 88.
I.
A Substantive agrees in case, etc.
I.
Substantivum casu, etc.
II.
Ablativus Eei Comparatse :
(1) Pro quam cum Nominative.
(2) Pro quam cum Accusative.
124. XIV.
III.
Multas Prsepositiones Ablativum
regunt. 122. XII. (See list.)
IV.
Ablativus Agentis expetit Prae-
positionem a, ab. 122. XII. b.
II.
Ablative of the Thing Compared :
(1) For quam with Nom.
(2) For quam with Ace.
124. XIV.
III.
Many Prepositions govern an
Ablative. 122. XII. (See list.)
IV.
The Ablative of the Agent takes
the Preposition a, ab. 122. XII. b.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
203
LATIN.
V.
Ablativus est Casus rerum quas
circumstant et adverbial! more
limitant actionem. Definit etiam
Tempus et Locum. 110.
V. Ablativus Causse.
VI. Ablativus Instrument!.
VII. Ablativus Modi.
VIII. Ablativus Conditionis.
IX. Ablativus Qualitatis, cum
Epitheto.
X. Ablativus Eespectus.
XT. Ablativus Pretii.
XII. Ablativus Mensuras.
XIII. Ablativus Materise.
111-119.
XIV.
Ablativus Temporis respondet,
si rogatur, Quando ? Intra quan-
tum tempus ? Quanta tempore ante
vel post ? 120. X.
XV.
Oppidorum nomina singularia
ex Declinatione prima et secunda
locum stationis denniunt per casus
in , i. 121. XII. a.
XVI.
Ablativus oppidi Prsepositione
caret, cum rogatur Unde ?
Ita domo, rvre.
121. XI. C.
XVII.
Ablativus Loci ponitur sine
Prsepositione, cum rogatur, qua
via ?121. XL A.
XVIII.
Substantivum cum Participio
coalescit in Ablative, qui vocatur
Absolutus. 125. XV.
ENGLISH.
V.
The Ablative is the Case of cir-
cumstances which attend action,
and limit it adverbially. It defines
also time and space. 110.
V. Ablative of Cause.
VI. Ablative of the Instrument.
VII. Ablative of Manner.
VIII. Ablative of Condition.
IX. Ablative of Quality with
Epithet.
X. Ablative of Eespect.
XL Ablative of Price.
XII. Ablative of Measure.
XIII. Ablative of Matter.
111-119.
XIV.
The Ablative of Time answers
the questions, When? Within
ic hat time? How long before or
after ? 120. X.
XV.
Singular names of towns of the
first and second Declension define
the place of station by cases in
o>, i. 121. XII. a.
XVI.
The Ablative of a town is with-
out a Preposition, when the ques-
tion is Whence ?
So domo (from home).
rure (from the country).
121. XI. C.
XVII.
The Ablative of Place is put
without a Preposition when the <
question is By ichat road ?
121. XL A.
XVIII.
A Substantive combines with a
Participle in the Ablative which is
called Absolute. 125. XV.
204
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Page 94.
LATIN. ENGLISH.
I.
Infinitivi Casus sunt Gerundia
et Supina. 141. II.
II.
Infinitivum, cum Gerundio, Par-
ticipiis, et Supino in um, eosdein
casus regit ac Verbum Finitum.
142. III.
III.
Infinitivum stat substantive,
pro Nominative vel Accusative.
140. I. (1).
IV.
Infinitivum stat oblique, cum
Accusative Subjecti. 140. I. (3).
V.
Infinitivum stat predicative,
in narrando, pro Verbo Finite.
140. I. (2).
VI.
Infinitivum stat prolata con-
structione Verbi vel Adjectivi.
140. I. (4).
I.
Gerunds and Supines are the
Cases of the Infinitive. 141. II.
II.
The Infinitive, with Gerund, Par-
ticiples, and Supine in um, governs
the same Cases as the Verb Finite.
142. III.
III.
The Infinitive stands substan-
tively, for Nominative or Accusa-
tive. 140. I. (1).
IV.
The Infinitive stands obliquely,
with Accusative of the Subject.
140. I. (3).
V.
The Infinitive stands Predica-
tively, in narration, for a Finite
Verb. 140. I. (2).
VI.
The Infinitive stands carrying
on the construction of Verb or
Adjective. 140. I. (4).
RULES OF SYNTAX.
205
GEEUNDS.
Page 95.
LATIN.
III.
Accusativus Gerundii Praeposi-
/ionibus adjungitur. 141. II. (1).
IV.
Genitivus Gerundii Substantivis
et Adjectivis additur. 141. II. (2).
V.
Dativus Gerundii Nominibus et
Verbis additur. 141. II. (3).
VI.
Ablativus Gerundii causae vel
modi est aut Praepositioni juugitur.
141. II. (4).
ENGLISH.
III.
The Accusative of the Gerund is
joined to Prepositions. 141. II. (1).
IV.
The Genitive of the Gerund is
joined to Substantives and Adjec-
tives. 141. II. (2).
V.
The Dative of the Gerund is
joined to Nouns and Verbs. 141.
II. (3).
VI.
The Ablative of the Gerund is of
cause or manner, or is joined to a
Preposition. 141. H. (4).
SUPINES.
II.
Supinum in um Accusativus est
post Verba motus. 141. II. (5).
Iri cum Supino efficitlnfmitivum
futuri Passivi. 141. II. (5). a.
III.
Supinum in u pro Ablativo Pte-
epectus est. 141. II. (6).
II.
The Supine in um is an Accusative
after Verbs of motion. 141. II. (5).
Iri with the Supine forms the
Infinitive of the Future Passive.
141. II. (5). a.
III.
The Supine in u is for an Abla-
tive of respect. 141. II. (6).
206
NEW EASY LATIN PRIMER.
RULES NOT ARRANGED IN THEIR PROPER ORDER.
GERUNDIVE ATTRACTION.
In Geruudiis Transitivis usitatior
est Attractio Gerundiva; cujus con-
structionis regula est hascce :
Trabitur Objectum in Gerundivi
casum, Gerundivum in numerum
et genus Objecti. 143.
I.
In Transitive Gerunds the Gerun-
dive Attraction is more usual ; the
rule for which construction is the
following :
The Object is attracted to the
case of the Gerundive, the Gerun-
dive to the Number and Gender of
the Object. 143.
Genitivus Rei Distributee Par-
titivis adjungitur, quse, quantum
licet, Genitivi sumunt genus. 130.
IV.
PARTITIVE GENITIVE.
A Genitive of the Thing Dis-
tributed is joined to Partitive
words, which, as far as may be,
take the Gender of the Genitive.
130. IV.
ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION.
AblativusSeparationis et Originis
etiam sine Praepositione Verbis et
Participiis adjungjtur. 123. XIII.
The Ablative of Separation and
Origin is joined also with a
Preposition to Verbs and Par-
ticiples. 123. XIII.
THE END.
Builer A Tanner. The Selwood Printing Works, Frome, and London.
Price as. 6d.
By the Same Author.
In the Press.
EASY EXERCISES FOR BEGINNERS,
AS A.
COMPANION VOLUME
TO
EASY LATIN
207
BY THE SAME AUTHOE.
Ninth Edition. 12mo. Price Is. 6d. Cloth.
A SHORT AND EASY LATIN BOOK.
Fourth Edition. 12mo. Price 3s. 6d. Cloth.
A FIRST EASY LATIN READING BOOK.
Third Edition. 12mo. Price 3s. 6d. Cloth.
A SECOND EASY LATIN READING BOOK.
Fifth Edition. 12mo. Price 2s. 6d. Cloth.
A SHORT AND EASY GREEK BOOK.
Second Edition. 12mo. Price 5s. Cloth.
A FIRST EASY GREEK READING BOOK.
12mo. Price 5s. Cloth.
A SECOND EASY GREEK READING BOOK.
Third Edition. 12mo. Price Is. 6d. Cloth.
FIRST GREEK READER FOR USE AT ETON.
Drawn up at the request of the Lower Master of Eton College, and
row in use at Eton, Harrow, Merchant Taylors', etc.
12mo. Price 2s.
FIRST BOOK OF HOMER'S ILIAD.
In graduated lessons, with full notes and vocabularies.
Just Published. 12mo. Price 2s. 6d. Cloth.
SELECTIONS FROM THE LATIN AUTHORS.
PROSE AND VERSE.
In Separate Parts. Price Is. 6d.
SWAIT SONNENSCHEIW, LiE BAS & LOWREY, PATERNOSTER SQUARE.
" FEW living classical scholars have done so much or nearly so much as
Mr. FOWLB has done to smooth the way of the classical scholar by a series
of elementary works, which for accuracy in detail and perfection of method,
as well as practical utility, are, as a whole, unsurpassed by similar works
in this country. The present volume (' Selections from the Best Latin
Authors') was commenced years ago, and the delay ought to be forgiven
on account of the excellence of the work now that it is completed. Before
pointing out in detail the excellences of this most useful and charming
book we venture to express our regret that its value is sooiewhat lessened
in our opinion by the want of order which pervades it. The divisions made
are simply two, prose and poetry. The prose begins with Eutropius and
ends with Tacitus, and the poetry begins with Catullus and ends with
Martial. At the end of the prose selections, as well as at the end of the
poetry selections, the editors give their ' Helps for Construing,' which are
helps in reality as well as in name. Their tone is scholarly and thorough,
and no real difficulty, either in the text of the author or in his allusions, is
shirked. We can scarcely conceive a work more capable of introducing a
student to the profitable reading and study of the Latin authors' prose
and verse than this admirable and scholarly work of Messrs. FOWLE and
WHITAKER. We may add that it contains a short but the best summary of
Latin writers we have seen anywhere." Sc7iool Board Chronicle.
203
By the Same Author.
i.
SIMPLE SENTENCES.
FIRST SERIES.
For translation into Latin and English.
Price Qd. ; free by post Id.
IL
SIMPLE SENTENCES.
SECOND SERIES.
For Translation into English.
Price Is. ; free by post Is. 2tZ.
III.
A SHORT ACCOUNT OF SOME OF THE GODS
AND HEROES OF ANTIQUITY.
For schools and families. 68 pages.
Price Is.; free by post Is. 2d.
IV.
GEOGRAPHY MANUALS.
4d. each. 16 pages.
1. Introductory PART I. I 3. Water PART III.
2. Land PART II. | 4. England & Wales PART IV.
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWREY, PATERNOSTER SQUARE.
209
THE SATURDAY BE VIEW
March 21th, 1875.
SOME STEPPING-STONES TO SCHOLARSHIP/
" In the interest of both parents and pupils, we think it right to draw attention to
two or three succinct and well-considered aids to the attainment of classical know-
ledge, in the way of grammar, composition, and collateral matters, which now lie
on our table.
" Of these we place in the first rank two volumes differing in grade and scope,
yet of the same practical character, excellently fitted, the one for grounding the
merest tyro, the other for giving him, when grounded, an insight into the principles
and philosophy of the grammar he has laid in by rote. The first is A Short and
Easy Greek Book, by Mr. EDMUND FOWLB ; the other an annotated Greek Accidence,
by Mr. Evelyn Abbott, now a tutor, we believe, at Balliol ; and it has seldom been
our fortune to light upon Greek grammars in which economy and retrenchment of
space went so thoroughly along with lucidity and solidity of information. Mr.
FOWLB'S book, indeed, combining grammar, exercises, and vocabulary in the space
of one hundred and forty pages, distinctly aims at not only being, but also (which
is a harder task, though it may appear paradoxical to say so) at seeming to the
learner's eye as easy as possible. To this end each subject has been confined to one,
or at most two, pages, and a vast amount of thought and pains has been bestowed
upon such arrangements of declensions, division of a declension, tenses, and tables
of verbs as obviate wearisome repetition, and establish a sequence readily appre-
ciable by the learner. A further recommendation is that Mr. FOWLE'S book runs in
the lines of Wordsworth's Greek Grammar, and, in a less degree, in those of Mr.
St. John Parry's, one or other of which is in use at most of our larger schools. And,
though the nature of the Short and Easy Greek Book peremptorily excludes philolo-
gical and philosophical explanations, which the pupils for whom it is designed would
be certain to ignore, it is remarkable how seldom we have been able to trace the
slightest omission of essential matter, and how often an impression is produced
that the author has weighed with nicety the claims of this or that detail to be
included as of vital elementary importance. . . . Yet Mr. Abbott's aim and
object is also simplification. . . . When we come to the declensions of sub-
stantives, both writers are found practically limiting these to three, with a division
of a third into five classes, and Mr. FOWLB has laudably simplified the intricacies
of the vocative singular and dative plural of this last by a few simple rules. . . .
" In anote to his compendious account of the comparison of adjectives, Mr. FOWLB
makes a reservation that ' this formation of comparatives and superlatives is only
given for the sake of learning the language, and that it is not to be supposed that it
represents the original growth of the words'; and so elsewhere he distinguishes
between the easy way for beginners and the more philosophical way, as regards
forming the tenses. . . . We may add that a great enhancement of the useful-
ness of Mr. FOWLE'S manual is that it contains a series of simple and progressive
exercises upon the steps of grammar as the pupil masters them, thus superseding
the necessity of a 'Delectus,' and insuring the pupil's safe footing as he goes for-
ward. Similar praise may be bestowed on his Short and Easy Latin Book and his
two graduated Latin Readers, leading the pupil up to selected passages of Caesar,
Ovid, and Virgil. His constant attention to the abridgment of labour, and the
acquirement of aptness in translation by progressive vocabularies and pertinent
footnotes, shows a clear sense of his mission as an instructor," etc., etc., etc.
* A Short and Easy Greek Book. By Rev. Edmund Fowle. Longmans. 1874.
The Elements of the Greek Accidence, with Philological Notes. By Evelyn Abbott,
M.A., of Balliol College, Oxford. Rivingtons. 1874.
A Short and Easy Latin Book. Fourth Edition. 1873. A First Easy Latin Reading
Book. Second Edition. 1874. A Second Easy Latin Reading Book. 1873. By Rev.
Edmund Fowle. Longmans.
210
REVIEWS OF THE LATIN AND GREEK BOOKS.
"It is no exaggeration of Mr.
FOWLE'S merits as an educational
author to say that, since the days of
Dr. Kerchever Arnold, no such ad-
vance has been made in the quality
and usefulness of classical school
books as that achieved by Mr. FOWLE
in the easy series of Latin and Greek
manuals which he has published.
It was our lot to be the very first
to recognise the great and special
merit of these works, and we are
glad to see," etc., etc. SCHOOL
BOABD CHBONICLE.
' ' The grand and distinctive merit
of these books is the admirable skill
with which the author has carefully
excluded all the more difficult and
advanced matters, and yet has
prepared the way for their later ac-
quirement. This faculty of exclusion
and simplification amounts almost
to genius. It requires no little skill
to confine every subject within the
limit of one or, at the most, two
pages, and at, the same time to pre-
pare the pupil for the study of larger
and more comprehensive treatises,
by a perfectly natural and easy
growth ; and yet this has been achieved
by Mr. FOWLE with perfect and un-
erring skill." THE SCHOOLMASTBB.
" It is impossible to speak in terms
of too high satisfaction of Mr. EDMUND
FOWLE'S ' First Easy Latin Reading
Book.'" JOHN BULL.
"Among those who have lately
published excellent working me-
thods for elementary teaching, one
of the highest places ought to be
reserved for Mr. FOWLE. His little
book is one of the most striking
instances we could find of a thought-
ful adult mind making the way easy
for the young learner. It is always
dangerous to assert an absolute
superlative ; but it seems to us that
this little Latin Reading Book for
beginners is one of the best that has
ever come into our hands." QUAB-
TEHLT JOUENAL OF EDUCATION.
"The Rev. EDMUND FOWLB'S
' Second Easy Latin Reading Book '
(Longmans') carries a step farther
the plan of elementary teaching so
ably sketched out in his ' Short and
Easy Latin Book,' and ' First Easy
Latin Reading Book.' Everything,
however simple, that the pupil
ought to know, is put before him in
the plainest and most direct lan-
guage." GUAEDIAN.
" It is a common complaint
amongst tutors that there is a great
want of good elementary Greek
books. We do not think they have
any further ground of dissatisfaction
since the appearance of Mr. FOWLE'S
most admirable manual." OXFORD
UNDEEGBADUATES' JOUENAL.
" Mr. FOWLE'S earlier educational
works have been noticed in our
columns with well-merited praise.
The volume before us lacks nothing
of the striking excellences which
marked its valuable predecessors.
It is simple in the extreme, very
gradual in its steps, clear in expres-
sion, and shirks no difficulty. The
passages selected are from the
purest models of the purest Latin-
ity." SCHOOLBOABD CHBONICLE.
" The same good work which the
Rev. EDMUND FOWLE has done for
beginners in Latin by his ' Short
and Easy Latin Book' he has now
performed for those beginning
Greek, in his companion volume,
'A Short and Easy Greek Book.'
The arrangement is excellent, and
there is the same simplicity and
adaptation to the special difficulties
of beginners which made Mr.
FOWLE'S previous work so great a
success." JOHN BULL.
"The early study of the Greek
language has many thorny steps,
and we think any boy fortunate
who has such sedulous care given
as is here shown to help him o yer
them. It must be a very idle or
a hopelessly stupid boy whom such
a system as this would not bring, as
old Lily said, ' past the wearisome
bitterness of his learning.' " LITE-
BAET CHUECHMAN.
211
REVIEWS OF THE LATIN AND GREEK BOOKS-continued.
"This very easy and carefully
selected reading book is framed on
the model of the author's Latin
Reading Book, which we have
commended so cordially in our
columns. We speak our fullest con-
viction of the merits of the work when
we declare it to be by far the easiest
and most useful introduction, to Greek
when a pupil has once mastered
the rudiments of his Greek Gram-
mar." EVENING STANDARD.
" The author of these books, who
is a classical scholar of high attain-
ments, has performed a difficult and
important task with complete suc-
cess, . . . and top much cannot
be said in praise of his work. While
his books are free from the defects
of works of a similar kind, they are
marked by striking excellences."
WORCESTER JOURNAL.
"They remain now, as when they
were published the simplest and, in
our opinion, the most effective of any
classical primer we know." LITE-
RARY CHURCHMAN.
"The study of language is no
easy matter, . . . but some
teachers have the gift to lighten the
student's labour ; and such a man is
Mr. FOWLE, who has the ability to
clear away difficulties, and thereby
smooth the way to the attainment
of a thorough knowledge of a lan-
guage. Jv T o one but a practical teacher
could do what the author has done ;
and in this respect his Greek Book
is quite as easy as his Latin."
BRIGHTON GAZETTE.
" It has seldom been our fortune
to light upon a Greek Grammar in
which economy and retrenchment
of space went so thoroughly along
with lucidity and solidity of infor-
mation. ... A vast amount of
thought and pains has been be-
stowed upon such arrangements of
declensions, divisions of a declen-
sion, tenses, and tables of verbs,
as obviate wearisome repetition and
establish a sequence appreciable by
the learner." SATURDAY REVIEW.
" We have examined these books
in a somewhat sceptical spirit,
fancying that amid the shoals of
books of a similar character issuing
daily from the press there could
be no possible ground for granting
them even a conditional welcome ;
but Mr. FOWLS has converted our
scepticism into something like a
well-assured and hopeful faith. The
first of the two contains a very con-
cise grammar, chiefly valuable for
what it does NOT contain, and at the
same time ingeniously putting the
information it does contain in the
form most adapted for comprehen-
sion and retention by the youthful
pupil ; and this grammar is followed
up by some very easy exercises,
admirably adapted to the slow and
painful steps which can be taken
by the child. The book reveals on
every pa(je the experience of one who
has not only worked with children, but
felt for them," SCHOOLIUSTEH.
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWREY, PATERNOSTER SQUARE.
212
By the Same Author.
12mo, cloth, price 2s. ; free by post 2s. 2d.
Cheaper Edition, boards, Is., free by post, Is. 2d.
THE
SGHOOLBOY'S fIRST BOOK
OP
E^SY
EXTRACT FROM PREFACE.
MY objection to nearly all those Books of Poetry which have
fallen into my hands is, that there are so few pieces suitable for
children, from nine to fourteen years of age, to commit to memory
some are too easy, and some too difficult. I believe that all
the pieces in the present selection are of very nearly the same
difficulty not childish, I hope, but at the same time simple in
the matter and in the versification.
Another objection to nearly all the selections I have seen is
that they contain the same stock pieces very pretty many of
them, and very suitable, but too well known for me to care to
give them in my Book. I append a list of many such pieces
which will not be found in the present publication.
The present book would not do, certainly, to be the only Poetry
Book in use in a school, or the younger generation would grow
up without knowing many of our old favourites ; it is therefore
not intended to take the place of books now in general use,
but to supplement them.
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWKEY, PATEENOSTEB SQUARE.
213
By the Same Author.
SIXPENNY SCRIPTURE MANUALS.
I.
A SHORT BIBLE HISTORY,
FOP Schools and Families.
II.
THE WANDERINGS OF THE ISRAELITES:
Settlement in Canaan, Government by Judges, etc.
Life of Saul, David, and Solomon.
III.
THE KINGS OF JUDAH AND ISRAEL.
In Parallel Columns.
IV.
SHORT PAPERS ON JEWISH HISTORY.
Giving in connected form the times after the Captivity down to
the destruction of Jerusalem.
V.
THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES.
Dealing chiefly with the Travels of S. Paul.
All the above neatly and tastefully bound in cloth, and uniform in
size and price.
6d. ; free by post Id.
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWREY, PATEJINOSTER SQUARE.
214
By the Same Author.
THE GOSPELS,
HARMONIZED AND AEEANGED IN SHOET EEADINGS,
Has now "been brought out in six separate parts, as
"THE LIFE OF CHRIST,"
In ihe Author's "Sixpenny Scripture Manuals."
Price 6d. each; free by post Id.
The Literary Review says :
"The idea which suggested the arrangement of the
Gospels observed in this book was a very happy inspiration
on the part of the industrious editor. The whole work is
worthy of the very highest commendation. It will be
found most useful by the masters and teachers of schools
of all grades, either as a class reading book or for personal
use; and for the clergy and students generally, it will
prove invaluable as a work of reference."
The School Guardian says:
" Mr. FOWLE has the happy art of producing books that
are useable, books that one can teach from. Himself a
teacher, he has found by experience what boys can learn,
how they can learri, and how far it is expedient that their
teacher should help them, or ho'w far the books they use
should be suggestive of help. He has utilised this insight
in the preparation of the Gospels Harmonized, and has
succeeded, perhaps as far as any one ever can, in harmon-
izing the facts and dates of the four evangelical narratives.
We think it will make a capital class-book for the better
kind of schools, and will be, as it is designed to be, ex-
ceedingly useful to teachers, pupil teachers, and for family
reading."
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN, LE BAS & LOWBET, PATERNOSTER SQUARE.
215
By the Same Author.
PRICE CD. ; FREE BY POST, GD.
HELP TO DEVOTION.
This is a little Book of Meditation, most tastefully got
up, with cloth case for the pocket.
There are two separate editions
(1) FOR BOYS AT HOME OR AT SCHOOL.
(2) FOR THOSE LATELY CONFIRMED.
A -well-known Literary Clergyman writes : " Many thanks for
your attractive-looking and really useful manual for confirmation
candidates; kindly send me thirty copies." Others write: "It
is one in a thousand. I turned over all stock last year,
and saw nothing equal to it." "It is really a well thought out
little matter." "Very many thanks for the little manual so
carefully compiled and so beautifully got up." " Send six copies.
I like them much, and wish to give them to my confirmation
candidates." " Many thanks for your extremely good little Book
of Meditations ; I am greatly pleased with it. Can they be had
by the dozen at any abatement, for distribution in a Parish ? "
Three Head Masters of Public Schools write : " I thank you very
much for the charming little book which you inclosed. Are they
published ? " "I like it exceedingly, and if you will send me
twenty copies I shall be glad to give them to some of our nuper
confirmati." " Thanks for the other attractive-looking little gift.
I will draw my masters' attention to it." A London publisher
writes : " It is a perfect little gem."
TO BE HAD AT PRESENT ONLY OF
BEV. EDMUND FOWLE, AMESBURY HOUSE, BICKLEY, KENT.
Twelve or more copies sent post free.
6
216
CVi
<LO
H
-P
00
University of Toronto
Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
LOWE-MARTIN CO. LIMITED
